• *> C*J , 1 /. 1 LIBRARY OF CONGRESS J hap, -■^■g.iV . 5 ^£ ijfi 5_ | J UNITED STATES 0? AMERICA < ■»<»•%.■»,■«, ■%.«.^,^ This edition of the Ceremonial, published by order of the First Council of Baltimore, for the use of the Catholic Churches in the United States of America, having been carefully revised and corrected by the lit. Rev. Dr. Becker, Bishop of Wilmington, is hereby approved of. Given at Baltimore this 4th day of November. J. ROOSEVELT BAYLEY, Archbishop of Baltimore. Feast of St. Charles Borromeo, A. D., 1875. PREFACE TO THE FOURTH EDITION. In presenting to the public this edition of the Ceremonial, for the use of Catholic Churches in the United States, it has been our duty simply to correct the various mistakes found in the former editions ; and it will appear evident that many corrections, some of them quite important, have been made in the present revision, and the whole plan of the book has been rendered much more convenient and natural. This we have endeavored to perform with great care, having consulted very many of the best and most recent authors, and taken the advice of those whose knowledge and experience rendered them thoroughly capable of giving proper directions. Despite our best efforts, something may be found wanting to the completeness of the work, yet we place it before our brethren of the clergy with the X PREFACE. declaration that we know of nothing more com- plete in the English language on the subject treated, nor do we think that greater uniformity can be ob- tained than by following closely the directions here given, all of which we take from Roman sources, and submit entirely to the Sacred Con- gregation of Rites. We have not deemed it advisable to alter the arrangement of this edition, since the clergy having become accustomed to the former ones, might ex- perience some difficulty in finding the subjects treated of. The corrections in this edition mainly refer to the ceremonies connected with Benedic- tion of the Blessed Sacrament, the Forty Hours' Devotion, and some few regarding . High Mass. We have thought it well to add an Appendix on the " Defects which may occur in the celebration of Mass," and, whilst alluding to these, we would like to take this opportunity of impressing on the minds of all the importance of exactitude in carry- ing out ceremonies, even the most minute. This care and exactitude can very well be observed without displaying any affectation. The ceremonies of the Church have a meaning PREFACE. XI and are well calculated to inspire respect and de- votion in the faithful, provided they are properly carried out. If, however, Ecclesiastics are not well versed in the ceremonies of any sacred rite, the impression produced is far from being religious or edifying, and the intention of the Church is, in this respect, frustrated. As a rule too little attention is paid to certain ceremonies which are esteemed by some as of such slight importance as not to merit care in their preparation ; as, for instance, genuflecting, boiuing and incensing. It would take too much time and space to enumerate the almost endless varieties introduced in the per- formance of these simple movements. Let the young Levites then be well grounded in ceremonies during their Seminary career ; let them convince themselves that by zeal and fidelity to the prescriptions of the Rubrics, they are contributing to the " decency " and "order" of Divine Service, and let them remember that a carelessness in trifling matters once acquired easily and surely leads to a disregard of important Rubrics. As we have disclaimed perfection in getting out Xll PREFACE. this edition, we subjoin a few typographical errors which have escaped the proof-reader : 27, pro Oramuste lege Oramus tc. " Pax vobis " Dominus vobiscum. " particles " particle. « No. 6 " No. 5. " Timit » Timet. " cords " cards. omit " in an audible voice." 11, pro cross lege crosier. deacon " assistant deacon. first deacon u assistant deacon. Procedamus " Eecedamus. semipterne " sempiterne. incovenient " inconvenient. before amen insert et custodiat nos semper g. io, \ 27, » 62, ' ' 1, " 93, « 1 9, " 125, ' ' io, " 139, « 1 3, " 141, « ' 5, « 195, ' ' 9, « 276, < 1 11, » 278, ' 1 6, " 328, « .' 12, " 379, « < 17, » 382, « ' 3, " 383, « 1 1, " 397, ' ' 9, CONTENTS. PART I. Ceremonies of Low Mass. CHAP. PAGE I. — Art. I. What is to be prepared, 1 II. On the Preparation for Mass by the Priest, . 3 III. On Leaving the Sacristy, 6 IV. On approaching the Altar, .... 7 V. From the Commencement of the Mass to the Introit, 9 VI. From the Introit to the Epistle, . . .11 VII. Prom the Epistle to the Offertory, ... 13 VIII. From the Offertory to the Canon, ... 15 IX. From the Canon to the Consecration, . . 19 X. From the Consecration to the Pater Foster, . 23 XL From the Pater Noster to the Communion, . 25 XII. From the Communion to the End of Mass, . 31 XIII. On Votive Masses, .33 II. — Order to be observed in celebrating two Masses on the same day, 37 III. — Low Mass for the Dead, 39 IV. — Low Mass when the Blessed Sacrament is exposed, . 41 V. — Of Low Mass in the presence of Prelates, ... .43 VI. — Giving Communion, ....... 45 Art. I. Giving Communion during Mass, . . .45 II. Purification of the Ciborium, . . . .48 III. On giving Communion at other times, . . 48 6 CONTENTS. CHAP. PAGE VII. — Manner of Serving a Priest at Low Mass, . . .51 Art. I. General Remarks, 51 II. Of the Vesting of the Priest, . . . .52 III. From the beginning of the Mass to the end of it, 53 VIII. — Manner of Serving a Bishop at Low Mass, . . .57 Art. I. Things to be prepared, . . . . . 57 II. Of the Preparation and Vesting of the Bishop, 57 ' III. When there is but one Chaplain, . .62 IX. — Manner of Celebrating High Mass without Deacon or Sub-deacon, . . 64 Art. I. Things to be prepared, 64 II. Vesting of the Celebrant, . . . . .65 III. Ceremonies of the Mass, 65 X. — Vespers sung without Cope-bearers, . . . .68 Art. I. Things'to be prepared, . . . . .68 II 70 PABT II. Ceremonies for Holy Week and other Festivals. I. — Blessing of Candles on Candlemas Day, Art. I. Of what is to be prepared, . . II. Ceremonies to be performed on Candlemas Day II. — Of the Benediction of Ashes on Ash Wednesday, . Art. I. Things to be prepared, .... II. Of the Sacred Rites to be performed, III.— Of Palm Sunday, . Art. I. What is to be prepared ' II. Of the Ceremonies to be performed IV.— Of Maundy Thursday, . Art. I. What is to be prepared, II. Of the Sacred Rites, V.— Of Good Friday, . Art. I. Of what is to be prepared II. Of the Sacred Rites, VL— Of Holy Saturday, Art. I. What is to be prepared II. Of the Sacred Rites, VII. — The Asperges, when there is but one Priest, 75 75 76 81 81 82 85 85 86 91 91 93 98 98 99 111 111 113 122 CONTENTS. 7 CHAP. PAGE VIII. — Benediction with the Blessed Sacrament, . . . 326 Art. I. "What is to be prepared, 126 II. Ceremonies (one Priest), ..... 127 III. V/hen the officiating Priest is assisted by another Priest, etc., ..... 131 IV. "When the Bishop gives Benediction, . . 133 PAKT III. Ceremonies of High Mass. I. — Rules to be observed by the Clergy in Choir, Art. I. The order of going to the Choir, II. The order to be observed in Choir, . III. Internal dispositions, .... IV. The order to be observed in receiving Holy Communion, . . . . V. The order in going from the Choir, II. — Instructions for the Officers, ... Art. I. Things to be prepared, . . . II. Instruction for the Censer-bearer, . III. Instruction for the Acolytes, . IV. Duty of the Master of Ceremonies, V. Instruction for the Sub-deacon, VI. Instruction for the Deacon, VII. Instruction for the Celebrant, . III. — High Mass for the Dead, Art. I. Things to be prepared, .... II. What is to be particularly observed, IV. — Solemn Vespers, Art. I. Things to be prepared, .... ■ II. General Rules to be observed, . III. Instruction for the Acolytes, . IV. Instruction for the Censer-bearer, . V. Instruction for the Master of Ceremonies, VI. Instruction for the Cope-bearers, VII. Instruction for the Celebrant, . V. — Of Solemn Vespers, and of the Procession on Corpui Christi, Art. I. Of solemn Vespers, the Blessed Sacrament exposed, ...... II. Of the Procession on Corpus Christi, 135 135 136 138 139 140 141 141 142 146 150 157 165 173 180 180 180 183 183 184 185 186 188 191 194 196 196 200 8 CONTENTS. CHAP. PAGE VI. — Vespers for the Dead on the 1st of N/ovember, . . 202 Art. I. Things to be prepared, 202 II. Ceremonies peculiar to these Vespers, . . 202 PAKT IV. Ceremonies for the Principal Festivals. I.— Feast of the Purification, 204 Art. I. Necessary Preparations, 204 II. From the Vesting of the Ministers to the Dis- tribution of the Candles, .... 205 III. From the Distribution of the Candles to the Procession, 206 IV. The Procession, 208 II.— Ash Wednesday, .210 Art. I. Necessary Preparations, 210 IT. Of the Blessing and Distribution of the Ashes, 211 III. Of the Mass, . . . . . . .214 III. — Sundays Laetare and Gaudete, . . . . . 215 IV.— Palm Sunday, .215 Art. I. Preparations, 215 II. From the Beginning of the Ceremony to the Distribution of the Palms, .... 216 III. Of the Distribution of the Palms, . . .218 IV. Of the Procession, 220 V. Of the Mass and Passion, . . . .222 V.— Office of the Tenebra?, 225 Art. I. Preparations, ....... 225 II. From the Commencement to the End of the Office, 225 VI.— Maundy Thursday, . . 227 Art. I. Preparations, 227 II. Of the Mass, 228 III. Of the Procession, 281 IV. Of Vespers, and of the Stripping of the Altars, 233 VII.— Of Good Friday, . 235 Art. 1. Preparations, ....... 235 II. From the Vesting of the Ministers to the Un- . covering of the Cross, ..... 236 CONTENTS. • 9 CHAP. PAGE III. From the Uncovering of the Cross to the Pro- cession, ....... 239 IV. Of the Procession, 242 V. Of the remaining Part of the Office, . . 244 VIII.— Holy Saturday, ........ 247 Art. I. Things to he prepared, 247 II. From the Benediction of the New Fire to the Exultet, 249 III. From the Exultet to the Prophecies, . . 252 IV. From the Prophecies to the Benediction of the Baptismal Font. 254 V. From the Benediction of the Font to the Be- ginning of Mass, 255 VI. The Mass, .258 PAET V. Ceremonies for Mass and Vespers, Solemnly Celebrated by the Bishop, or in His Presence. I. Solemn Pontifical Vespers, 261 Art. I. Things to be prepared, ..... 261 II. From the entrance of the Bishop and Clergy to the beginning of Vespers, .... 262 III. From the beginning to the end of Vespers, . 262 II. Solemn Vespers, in the presence of the Bishop, . . 265 III. Complins, when the Bishop officiates, .... 266 IV. Matins, when the Bishop officiates, .... 267 V. Lauds, when the Bishop officiates, ..... 269 VI. Solemn Pontifical Mass, 269 Art. I. Things to be prepared, ..... 269 II. Of the Vesting of the Clergy and of the Bishop, 273 III. The Pontifical Mass, 277 VII. Solemn Mass, celebrated in presence of the Bishop, dressed in Cope, ........ 288 VIII. Solemn Mass in presence of the Bishop, in Kochet and Cape, ..291 IX. Vespers for the Dead, celebrated by the Bishop, . . 292 X. Matins and Lauds for the Dead, celebrated by the Bishop, 293 10 CONTENTS. CHAP. PAGE XI. Solemn Pontifical Mass for the Dead, . . . .294 Art. I. Things to be prepared, ..... 294 II. From the beginning to the end of Mass, . . 295 III. The Absolution after Mass, . . . .297 XII. Solemn Mass for the Dead, in the presence of the Bishop, 299 XIII. Particular Instructions for the Officers who attend the Bishop, 300 Art. I. Instruction for the assistant Priest, . . . 300 II. Instructions for the two assistant Deacons, . 304 III. Instruction for the officiating Deacon, . . 308 IV. Instruction for the Sub-deacon, . . . 314 V. Instruction for the inferior Ministers, . -. 318 PART VI. Other Different Solemnities at which the Bishop Offici- ates or is Present. I. Commemoration of all the Faithful departed, . . 323 II. Sundays in Advent, 324 III. Christmas, 324 IV. Festivals between Christmas and Candlemas, . . 326 V. Candlemas, 326 VI. Ash Wednesday, 329 VII. Sundays in Lent, . 332 VIII. Palm Sunday, 332 IX. Matins of the Tenebrse, 336 X. Maundy Thursday, 336 XI. Good Friday, 346 XII. Holy Saturday, 354 XIII. Ceremonies to be observed in Provincial Councils, . 361 Art. I. "What is to be done before it opens, . . . 361 II. How the Metropolitan Church is to be adorned and arranged, 362 III. The opening of the Council, . . . . 363 IV. Mode of Procedure of the Council, . . .368 V. Second Solemn Session, ..... 370 VI. Third Solemn Session, 372 XIV. Ceremonies to be observed in Diocesan Synods, . . 375 CONTENTS. 11 CHAP. PAGE XV. Solemn administration of the Sacrament of Confir- mation, ......... 380 Art. I. Things to be prepared, ■ 380 II. The administration of the Sacrament, . . 381 XYI. Episcopal Visitation of Parishes, . . . . .383 Art. I. The Bishop's Eeception when he visits the Parishes, .383 APPENDIX. I. Forty Hours' Exposition, 391 Art. I. Things to be prepared for the Mass of the Ex- position, ....... 391 II. Of the Mass of the Exposition, . . . 392 III. Of the Procession for the Exposition, . . 394 IV. Of the Mass pro Pace, 397 V. Things to be prepared for the Mass of the Ex- position, ........ 398 VI. Of the Mass for the Eeposition, . . .398 VII. From the Litany to the end of the Forty Hours, 403 II. Different Intonations for Vespers and Solemn Mass, . 406 Elenchus Defectuum, 414 CEREMONIAL. PART I. d^ereinontea of fofo Jtlass. CHAPTEE I. Article I. WHAT IS TO BE PREPARED. On the Altar. 1. The altar, which should be of stone or marble, con- secrated by the Bishop, or, at least, having on it an altar- stone, also consecrated by the Bishop, should be covered with three clean altar-cloths. The first' two, long enough to cover the whole top, and the uppermost should reach the base of the altar on both sides. (Rub. Miss., part i, n. xx.) 2. In the middle of the altar, a crucifix sufficiently large to be distinctly seen. (Rub., ib.) 3. At least two candlesticks, with wax-candles, which should burn during the whole time of the Mass.* 4. In front of the altar, the antipendium of the color of the vestments.f (Rub., ib.) * All priests (even prelates, who are not Bishops) should have at their private Mass only two candles and one server. (S. R. C, 27th Sept., 1659.) f As the word antipendium is generally accepted to signify altar- veil, or frontal, it shall he made use of in this manual. 1 Z CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 5. If the Blessed Sacrament is in the tabernacle, the canopy covering the tabernacle should also be of the color of the vestments, unless black vestments be used. No canopy is needed over the tabernacle when the latter is of marble or stone. (Ccer. Ep., 21, c. xiii, n. 3.) 6. The altar cards.* 7. At the Epistle side, the bookstand. 8. On the credence^ or any suitable place, the cruets J with wine and water on a plate, the finger-towel and the hand-bell. Should the priest be obliged to celebrate Mass without the assistance of a server, the plate with cruets and towel should be placed on a stand, near the altar, at the Epistle side, not on the altar. In the Sacristy. .§ 1. The sacred vestments, of the color prescribed. They should be placed on the sacristy altar, || or ambry; they should be so disposed that the priest may find them in order as he vests. The chasuble should be adjusted first, so that the lower half of the front part will hang down from the ambry, and the lower part of the back be folded over the upper. Next, the stole, folded in four parts, should be laid across the chasuble, and the maniple across the stole. The girdle, in a serpentine form, should be placed on the maniple. The upper part of the alb should lie on the vestments, and over it the amice extended, the strings of which may be arranged on the amice itself. 2. The Missal. * "Tabernaculum, in quo assidue Divinissima servatur Eucharistia conopeo serico, vel simili materia? vestiri debet, ejus item coloris cujus est altaris Pallium ; quanquam pro colore nigro violaceus con- gruentior erit in honorem Christi viventis." {Meraii.) f Credence, generally used for the side table near the altar. % Cruets should be of glass, not of silver. (Gavan., P. 1,7, xx.) § If there is no sacristy, the sacred vestments are prepared on a table near the altar, or, if there is no table, on the Gospel side of the altar itself, not in the middle of it, unless a Bishop is to celebrate. (Rub. Miss.) || St. Charles Borromco recommends that the altar or ambry, on which the sacred vestments are laid, be covered with a white linen cloth. CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 6 3. The chalice,* and paten with particle, the purificator, the chalice-veil, the pall, and the burse with the corporal in it. 4. The priest's cap near the vestments, not on them, nor on the chalice. 5. A surplice for the server. 6. A lavatory, or place for the priest to w T ash the hands. Article II. On the Preparation for Mass. 1. The priest, wishing to celebrate the most Holy Sac- rifice, should prepare himself by prayer. Aliquantulum orationi vacet. (Rub. 31iss.) He should also have said matins and lauds. 2. The suitable prayers for the occasion are those sug- gested by the Church, and laid down in the Missal, that is, the anthem, Ne reminiscaris, with the Psalms and pray- ers that follow them. Should the priest say these prayers, he will take notice that the anthem above named is said entirely on feasts of double rite ; and during Paschal time the Alleluia is added to it. 3. It is well not to omit the pious protestation, Ego volo celebrare missam. By reciting this, not only he can gain the indulgences annexed to it, but he can make his Me- mento. (Rub. 31iss.) 4. The priest, clad in his cassock, opens the Missal, and marks the places of the Mass and prayers, that he may not lose time at the altar. (Rub. Miss.) After which, he * The chalice ought not to be carried to the altar, and fixed on it by any person before Mass, but the priest ought to carry it himself to the altar, not before he goes thither to begin Mass, but when vested with the sacred vestments he goes from the sacristy, or from the place where he dressed, to the altar, as directed. (lb., tit. ii, n. 1.) "Sacerdos omnibus paramentis indutus accipit rnanu sinistra calicem ut supra prseparatum, quern portat elevatum ante pectus, bursam rnanu dextra super calice tenens, et facta reverentia cruci, et capite cooperto acceditad altare cum ministro, cum Missali," etc. : any con- trary custom is to be looked upon as an abuse, which should be abol- ished. (See S. C. E., n. 4285.) 4 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. washes his hands, saying at the same time, in a low voice, Da, Domine, etc. 5. Having washed his hands, he prepares the chalice by placing on it a clean purificator,* in such a way that it will hang equally on both sides. On the purificator he places the paten, and on the paten, the Host, which should be round, entire, and free from loose particles, to remove which, the priest will pass his thumb and forefinger around the edge. [Rub. Miss.) Then he puts on it the pall,f which he covers with the veil. If the veil is not large enough to cover the whole chalice, he will arrange it so that it will hide that part of the chalice that will be to- wards the people while going to the altar. Last of all, he places the burse, containing the corporal,! on the veil. The opening of it should be towards himself as he proceeds to the altar. Nothing should be laid on the burse. (S. C. B., 1st Sept., 1703.) 6. Everything being prepared, the priest proceeds to vest. He will do well to make the sign of the cross, al- though the Eubric does not say so. If he does, he should * The purificator should be of plain linen, neither coarse nor very- fine. It may be about thirteen and a half inches square, with a very small cross worked in the centre. It requires no special blessing, but after use should not be handled by laics, until washed by some one in major orders. f According to the Eubric, the pall should be of linen. Formerly the pall formed a part of the corporal, which was large enough to cover the chalice. The inconvenience of its being too light can be obviated by having it made out of a piece of linen about four and one- eighth inches square, folded into four equal parts, sewed up at the edges, and well starched. "In sacrificio missae uti non licet palla a parte superiori drapo serico cooperta." (8. R. C, 2d Jan., 1701.) Nevertheless, by a late decision of the S R. C, the pall may be of silk cloth, ornamented on the outside, while the inside is of linen ; but it should not be black. " Permitti poss<; dummodo palla linea subnecta calicem cooperiat, ac pannus superior non sit nigri coloris, aut referat aliqua mortis signa " (S. R. C , 10th Jan., 18V2.) J The corporal should be of beautiful linen, very clean, and starch- ed. It should have a small cross worked in the middle, but not with gold or silver. It is generally folded by bending first one-third of it over, so as to cover the second third part ; again, the other third folded over the first. Then one-third of its length over the middle third part, and the last part bent over the rest. A corporal will be found sufficiently large, if it be from twenty-two to twenty-four inches square. The corporal is blessed, as well as the pall. CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. make it without the amice in his hand. He then takes the amice by the two corners where the strings are con- nected, raises it so that he may kiss the cross in the middle of the amice; lie puts it on his head, saying at the same time, Impone, Domine, etc. ; and as he continues the pray- ers, he adjusts the amice around his neck, so that every article of his neck-dress be entirety covered by it; and after crossing the strings upon his breast, the left being under the right, he passes them behind, and ties them in front with a loose knot.* (Rub. Hiss.) 7. He puts on the alb (without kissing it) by passing it over his head ; then he introduces his right arm into the right sleeve, and his left into the other. He adjusts it about his neck, and fits it around so that it descends about one inch above the floor all around, at the same time say- ing, Dealba me, Domine, etc. (Rub. Miss.) 8. As he girds himself with the cincture, f he says, Prce- cinge me, etc. (Rub. Miss.) The common practice is to leave the tassels hanging down as low as possible, to be able afterwards to fasten the stole with the two ends of the cord. 9. He takes the maniple and kisses the cross on it, and passing it over his left arm fastens it halfway between the hand and the elbow, saying, Her ear, Domine, etc. 10. Then having taken the stole, he kisses the cross on it, and, with both hands, he passes it over his head, fits it around his neck, so that both ends of the stole hang down at equal distances. Afterwards he crosses both ends of the stole, first passing towards his right the end that hangs on * In putting on the amice, he ought not to forget that the object of it is to cover entirely the usual dress, and that part of the cassock which is near the collar, and the collar itself; and, therefore, he ought to put it on so as to answer this purpose as directed, (lb., tit. i, n. 3.) " Ac primum accipiens amictum circa extremitates et chordulas, oscu- latur illud in medio ubi est crux et ponit super caput, et mox declinat ad collum, et eo vestium collaria circumtegens" etc. The first Council of Baltimore has strictly enjoined the ob.-ervance of this Rubric. In- dusia vero privati apparatus sub amictu et alba ia'teant, ita ut non indecoro vel mundano more appareant. (Con. Bolt. 1, Deer. 24.) f Cinctures may be made of either silk or cotton, and of any color except black. Congruentior est uti cingulo lineo. (S. R. C, n. 3436 ad. 7.) 6 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. his left side, and drawing over it the other end which hangs upon his right. Then he confines the stole with the ex- tremities of the cincture, which he allows to hang on each side under his arms, and not behind his back. In the meantime he says, Redde mihi, Domine, etc. 11. Lastly, he puts on the chasuble without kissing it, saying Domine, qui dixisti, etc. He will take care to fit it around the neck and shoulders, and tie it in front with the strings. He may then fasten a white clean handkerchief to the cincture, but it should not be visible beneath the chasuble. Article III. On Leaving the Sacristy. 12. The priest being vested, puts on his cap. Then, taking with his left hand the chalice per nodum, he lays his right flat on the burse, holding the chalice before his breast, neither too far, nor too near himself, but in a nat- ural position. He makes a low bow* to the cross or image in the Sacristy, and, preceded by the server, who carries the Missal, he proceeds to the altar, with a grave and mod- est deportment, his mind and heart occupied with the great mystery he is going to celebrate. 13. It is a laudable custom for the priest to take holy water and make the sign of the cross going to the altar. (S. B. C, 9th April, 1808.) Nevertheless, the Rubric does not prescribe it. 14. If the priest passes before the tabernacle containing the Blessed Sacrament, he will make a genuflection*!" with- out removing his cap. If he passes before the high altar, he makes a low bow to the cross. Should he pass before * Rubricians distinguish three kinds of bows: the low, the mod- erate, and the simple. A low bow is made by bending the head and the shoulders, so that the person making it could touch his knees with the extremities of his fingers. The moderate is made by sufficiently lowering the head, and somewhat bending the shoulders. The simple bow consists in simply bending the head, without perceptibly moving the shoulders. f A simple genuflection is made by bending the right knee to the floor, as near as possible to the left foot. CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 7 an altar where there is a relic of a saint whose feast is cele- brated, or some other remarkable relic, he makes a low bow, without taking his cap off. (Rub. 3Iiss.) If it be a relic of the true cross, he will make a genuflection with his head covered. (S. R. C, 7th May, 1766.) 15. If he should pass before the Blessed Sacrament ex- posed, or at the time of the elevation, or when Holy Com- munion is given, he will take off his cap, and kneel on both knees, being sure, in the last two-named instances, not to rise until after the elevation, or before the priest giving communion has returned to the altar, and placed the cibo- rium on the corporal. (Rub. 3Iiss.) If, however, in the latter case, the communicants should be too numerous, a genuflection on both knees will be sufficient, without re- maining until the end. (S. R. C, 5th July, 1698.) 16. When, on these occasions, the priest takes off his cap, either he will give it to the server to hold, until he is to put it on again, or he will hold it between his thumb and forefinger, with the opening of it towards himself, and with the last two fingers holding the burse, that it may not fall. 17. While the priest is going to, or coming from the altar, he should salute no one, except his Bishop or other great prelates, or some distinguished person, and then he should do so by a simple bow. He will do the same on meeting another priest, clad in sacred vestments, going to or returning from saying mass. If the two priests meet in a narrow passage, the one returning will give way to the one going to celebrate. 18. If, perchance, the priest should go to, or return from the altar, without the chalice (whenever he is to bow or make a genuflection), he should take off his cap. Article IV. On Approaching the Altar. 19. The priest, having reached the foot of the altar on which he is to celebrate, stops in the middle, takes off his cap, gives it to the server, and makes a low 7 bow r to the 8 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. cross. If the Blessed Sacrament be in the tabernacle, he makes a genuflection on the floor, not on the step. (Rub. Miss., Part ii, Tit. ii, n. 2.) 20. Then he ascends the steps, and, having arrived in front of the middle of the altar,* without making any bow, he places the chalice on the Gospel side. If the veil, being large, is turned over the burse, he will lower it immediately, with both hands. Then he takes the burse, brings it to the middle of the altar, holds it with his left hand, and with his right he takes the corporal from it, which he lays on the altar; after which, with his right hand, he will place the burse at the Gospel side, against the gradus, so that the aperture of it be towards the tabernacle, unless some figure be marked on it, requiring another position. His left hand he will keep on the altar.f 21. Then with both hands he will spread out entirely the corporal in the middle of the altar, sufficiently, but not too near the edge, that neither the maniple nor the chasuble may disturb it. 22. Having spread the corporal, with his left hand he will take the chalice per nodum, and, putting his right on the chalice covered with the veil, he will place it in the middle of the corporal at such a distance that he may after- wards conveniently kiss the altarj without touching the chalice. He will be careful to extend the lower extremi- ties of the veil, that the chalice may not be seen. (8. R. C, 12th Jan., 1669.) After this, without making any bow, * Some Rubricists direct that the priest, upon arriving at the altar, should make a bow to the cross. Nevertheless, neither the Rubrics of the Missal, nor any decree of the Sacred Congregation, makes such a prescription. f Asa general rule, when only one hand is employed, the other is kept on the altar ; before the consecration and after communion, off the corporal ; from the consecration to the communion, on the corporal. J Some writers on Rubrics are of opinion that the front part of the corporal should be laid over the foot of the chalice, giving as a reason, that there might remain on the corporal some consecrated particles; but the Rubrics of the Missal, Part 2, Art. 2, speaking of the cor- poral, says, quod extendit super altare. The general practice in Rome and Italy is to spread it entirely. The church supposes that every priest will follow exactly the Rubrics prescribed, and that, conse- quently, no consecrated particles will be left on the corporal. CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. V having his hands joined, he goes to the Epistle side,* opens the Missal where the Mass of the day is to be found (Rub. lliss.y n. 4), and then returns with his hands joined to the centre of the altar, where, having bowed moderately to the cross, he moves his right foot a little towards the Gospel side, in order to avoid turning his back to the cross, and descends to the foot of the altar, still keeping his hands joined. (Bab. 3Iiss.) Article V. From the Commencement of the Ifass to the Introit. 23. Having arrived in front of the last step, the priest turns on his right to the altar, and makes a low bow to the cross, or, if the Blessed Sacrament is in the tabernacle, he makes a genuflection on the last step, without making any other bow. Then standing modestly erect, he will com- mence Mass, by making on himself the sign of the cross (Rub. 3£iss.), pronouncing the words distinctly, and suffi- ciently loud to be heard by the faithful near the altar. 24. Having signed himself, f he says, in the same tone of voice, the antiphon, Introibo, and the psalm, Judica me Deus. While he says the Gloria Patri, he inclines his head, and stands erect at the Sieut erat. At the Adju- torium nostrum, etc., he makes the sign of the cross. 25. At the Confiteor, he inclines profoundly, still keep- ing his hands joined. At the words, Vobis fratres and Vos * To join -the hands, the palm and the fingers extended, of both hands, should be brought together, the thumb of the right to be crossed over the thumb of the left, except from the consecration till after the ablution. The hands, thus joined, should not be kept either too near or too far from the breast, nor too much turned towards the face, nor towards the floor, but naturally directed somewhat towards heaven. The elbows should recline gently towards the hips. f He makes the sign of the cross by putting his left hand extended under his breast, then he raises his right to his forehead, and, touching it with the extremit}' of his fingers, he says, In nomine Patris; then, with the same hand, touching his breast, says, Et Fllii ; touching his left and right shoulders, Et Spirilus Sancti; and again joining his hands, he says, Amen. 10 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. fratres, he does not turn towards the server, this being only done at Solemn Mass. In saying mea culpa, he strikes gently and unaffectedly his breast with the extremities of the fingers of his right hand, while he holds his left ex- tended below his breast. (Rub. Miss.) After the Mea maxima culpa, he rejoins his hands, and remains inclined until (the server having said Misereatur tui, etc.) he answers, Amen, upon which he resumes his former attitude. 26. The server, having terminated the Confiteor, the priest says, Misereatur vestri, etc.; and while he says In- dulgentiam, etc., he makes the sign of the cross. (Rub. Miss.) Then, inclining moderately, he says, Deus tu conversus, etc., and remains in that attitude till Oremus inclusively, which he says in the same' tone of voice, extending his hands* and immediately rejoining them, and having become erect, he ascends the steps slowly, saying at the same time, in a low voice, Aufer a nobis. f 27. Having arrived in front of the altar, he inclines moderately, puts his hands joined on the edge of the altar, so that the little fingers, joined and extended, touch the front of it, and the other fingers, being also joined and ex- tended, rest on the top. (In this manner the hands are to be placed, whenever the Rubric prescribes them to be joined upon the altar.) In this position, he says Oramuste, and at the words, Quorum reliquiae hie sunt, he extends his hands upon the altar, on either side of the corporal, and kisses the altar. J After which he becomes erect, joins his * In extending the hands, the priest should not allow them to pass the width of his body. f The Missal (with many Eubricists) does not prescribe any eleva- tion of the hands in this ease. The ceremonial of Bishops, however, enjoins it, perhaps only for Bishops ; nevertheless, it would seem that priests could also do so. % It is to be remarked, that whenever the priest kisses the altar,. he does so in the middle, not on one side, nor on the edge of it ; and that to do this properly, he should neither be too near, nor too far from the altar, lest he be awkward or affected. Neither is it suffi- cient in these cases to put the fingers on the altar, and it is too much to place the wrists there ; yet it is required to lay the hands on the altar-cloth. CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 11 hands, and turns towards the Epistle side, to which place he goes to commence the Introit, without making any bow to the cross. Article VI. From the Introit to the Epistle. 28. Having arrived opposite to the Missal, he commences the Introit aloud, making on himself the sign of the cross, and then having joined his hands, he continues in the same tone of voice;* as he says Gloria Patri, etc., he makes a simple bow to the cross, turning himself a little towards it, without, however, moving his feet. Should the holy name of Jesus occur during the Introit, he bows to the cross. If the name of Mary is mentioned, or the Saint whose feast is celebrated on that day, he bows towards the book. After the Sicut erat, he repeats the Introit, but does not make the sign of the cross. 29. At the end of the Introit, he returns to the middle, having his hands joined ; and, facing the chalice, he says alternately with the server, the Kyrie. (Rub. Miss.)\ 30. After the last Kyrie, if there are no Prophecies to be read, and the Gloria is to be said, he will disjoin the hands, and raise them as high as his shoulders, and with- out raising the eyes, he says, Gloria in excelsis, etc., and in the same tone of voice, in saying Deo, he joins the hands again, making a simple bow to the cross, and remains in that position till the end of the Gloria. At the words, Adoramus te, Gratias agimus tibi, Jesu Christe, Suscipe deprecationem nostram, Jesu Christe, he makes a simple bow to the cross. Whilst he says Cum Sancto Spiritu, etc., he makes the sign of the cross on himself, and having said Amen,% he kisses the altar in the usual way, joining his hands afterwards. * Sufficiently so to be heard by the faithful who assist near the altar. f Should there be no server the celebrant will recite all. % The priest is not to join his hands after making the sign of the cross after the Gloria, Credo and Benedictus qui venit, S. C. K., in una Mardorum, 12th Nov. 1831 (4520). 12 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 31. If there are Prophecies to be read, as is the case on the ember days, the priest, after the Kyrie (without making any bow), returns to the Missal, and says Oremus, etc. He reads the Prophecies in the same tone of voice, having at the same time both his hands either on the Missal, or on the stand. The Prophecies being concluded, he returns to the middle of the altar to say the Gloria. 32. After having kissed the altar, the priest standing erect, turns on his right, facing the people, and extending his hands and rejoining them again, he says Dominus vobiscum.* (Rub. Miss.) 33. Then he returns towards the Missal as before, he extends the hands, and rejoining them, he says, Oremus, at the same time making a simple bow towards the cross; and again extending his hands not higher than, nor be- yond his shoulders, as has been already said, he says the prayers, f 34. At the conclusion of the prayer or prayers, when Per Dominum nostrum is to be said, the priest shall join his hands, and bow simply to the cross; he shall remain erect, with hands joined, till the end of the conclusion of the prayer. If, however, the prayer concludes with the words, Qui vivis et regnas, or, Qui tecum vivit et regnat, without making any bow, he joins the hands while saying, in unitate Spiritus Sancti. (Bub. Hiss.) 35. When there is more than one prayer, he says Oremus only at the commencement of the first and of the second, so, also, the conclusion is said at the end of the first prayer and of the last. If, during the prayers, he pronounces the holy name of Jesus, or of Mary, or the Saint whose feast is celebrated *■ Whenever the priest says Dominus vobiscum, he does not look at the people, nor does he raise or lower the hands, and in extending them, he does not bring them beyond the limits of his body, but simply opens them so that the palm and fingers of one band face the other, and rejoins them again. Neither does he bend the head towards the ppople, nor does he rest his back against the altar. f The same thing is to be done whenever Oremus is to be said, unless something else is prescribed. Also, in pronouncing that word, care should be taken not to prolong the letter O, nor should it be said in any way affectedly. CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 13 that day, or the name of the Pope, he makes a simple bow, in the first case to the cross, in the others towards the Missal.* Article VII. From the Epistle to the Offertory. 36. At the end of the prayer or prayers, the priest reads the Epistle in the same tone of voice, having his hands on the book or book-stand, in such a manner, however, that he touches the Missal. (Rub. 3Iiss.) If, in reading the Epistle, he happens to pronounce the holy name of Jesus, he will bow as was said before. If he is to make a genuflec- tion, as is the case when he says, In nomine Jesu genuflec- tatur, etc., or, Adjuva nos Deus, he bends only the right knee to the floor. The last words of the Epistle he may say in a lower tone, as an indication to the server that he is to answer, Deo Gratias, but he should not turn his head towards him. After which, he reads, in the former tone of voice, the gradual, the tract, or the Sequentia, if these are to be read. 37. This done, he goes, with his hands joined, to the middle of the altar, where, having raised his eyes to the cro>s, he inclines profoundly, keeping his hands joined between his breast and the altar, and in that attitude he says, Munda cor meum. Then, Jube, Domine, etc. (Bub. Miss.) 38. Should there be no server, the priest will move the Missal to the Gospel side, so that the opening of it be some- what towards the middle of the altar. In moving the book, he makes a simple bow to the cross, and having adjusted it in its place, he returns to the middle to say the prayer above named. (Rub. Miss.) 39. The prayer being over, standing erect, and, having his hands joined, he goes to the book, his face turned par- tially towards the Gospel side, and in the same loud tone * In the prayer, A cunctis, the Patron Saint to be named is that of the place in which he celebrates. The name of the saint, founder of the community to which the priest happens to belong, is mentioned after that of the Patron Saint of the place. 14 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. of voice he says, Dominus vobiscum. In saying Sequentia, or Indium Sancti Evangelii, he disjoins his hands, and, with the thumb of his right, the fingers extended, he makes a cross on the commencement of the Gospel he is to read, at the same time keeping his left hand extended on the Missal. (S. R. C, 17th Sept., 1816.) Then he forms a cross with the same thumb on his forehead, his lips, and his breast, holding his left hand on his breast. (Rub. Ifiss., n. 2.) 40. After this, he joins his hands, and continues to read the Gospel in the same tone of voice. Should the holy name of Jesus, or any other name at which (according to what has been said before) he is to bow, be mentioned, he does so towards tihe book. So, also, should he be re- quired to make a genuflection, it is to be made towards the book, his hands supported on the altar. (Rub., ib.) The Gospel being read, he raises the Missal with both hands, at the same time bending a little over it, and kisses the commencement of the same Gospel, saying, in a low voice, Per Evangelica dicta, etc. 41. When he is to read the Passion, he makes a simple bow to the cross, as he goes from the Epistle side to the Gospel ; he reads the Passion in the same attitude as at the Gospel, without, however, making any sign of the cross. At the words, Emisit Spiritum, he kneels on both knees, his hand supported upon the altar, and again joins his hands, in which position he meditates for a few moments on the passion of our Lord. Then, resting his hands on the altar, he rises, rejoins the hands, and continues to read until where he is to say the Munda cor meum, which he says in the middle of the altar, in the same attitude pre- scribed above. After the Munda cor meum, he returns to the book, his hands being joined, and finishes reading the Passion ; at the end of which (except on Good Friday) he kisses the Missal as above, saying, Per Evangelica dicta, etc. 42. Having kissed the Missal, he replaces it on the stand, and, with both hands, he takes the stand with the Missal on it, and brings it nearer to the corporal, placing it so that he may conveniently read in it thereafter, and having rejoined his hands, he returns to the middle. CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 15 43. There (if the Credo is to be said) he extends his hands, raises them (not higher than his shoulders) at the word Credo, and joins them again at the words, In unum Deum, making at the same time a simple bow to the cross. In this position he continues the Credo to the end, in the same tone of voice, except that at the words, Et Incarnatus est, having placed the hands upon the altar, on either side of the corporal, he makes a genuflection with his right knee only (8. R. G, 22d August, 1818), in such a manner that, by commencing it at the Et Incarnatus, he touches the floor with his knee at the words Et Homo f actus est; as he makes the genuflection, he does not bend his head. He makes a bow at Jesum Christum, Simul adoratur; whilst he says Et vitam, etc., he makes on himself the sign of the cross, as at the end of the Gloria. Article VIII. From the Offertory to th$* omnipotently in unitate Spiritus 4* Sancti. (These crosses are formed between the chalice and himself.) Then bringing the Host over the chalice, and leaning the thumb and the forefinger on the edge of the cup, he raises the chalice a little with his left hand, at the same time saying, Omnis honor et gloria. Then having replaced the chalice and the Host in their re- spective places, he lightly rubs his fingers over the chalice, which he covers immediately after with his right hand, at the same time holding it with his left. After which, hav- ing placed his hands extended on the corporal, he makes a genuflection. Article XL From the Pater Noster to the Communion. 79. The priest having risen, with his hands still on the corporal, says aloud, Per omnia sozcula sasculorum. The server having answered Amen, he joins his hands as usual, and says, Or emus, at the same time bending his head some- what to the Blessed Sacrament. Having raised his head, he continues, with hands joined, the prayer till Pater Nos- ter, when, having extended his hands before his breast, he continues it to the end, at the same time keeping his eyes fixed on the Blessed Sacrament. (Pub. 3Iiss.) 26 CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 80. The server having answered, Bed libera nos a malo, the priest says to himself, Amen. Then, with his right hand he draws the paten from under the corporal, and cleans it, for which purpose he makes use of the purifica- tor, which he afterwards places at some distance from the corporal at the Epistle side. During this action his left hand is held on the corporal. Then, having taken the paten between the fore and middle fingers, he holds it upright, its edges resting near the corporal, and the concave part towards the sacred Host, and the hand above the paten, at the same time saying, Libera nos, etc. (Bub. Miss.) In pronouncing Marice he bows to the book. 81. In saying, Petro et Paulo, he places his left hand under his breast, and with his right, holding the paten, he makes with it the sign of the cross on himself, at the same time that he says, Da propitius pacem in diebus nostris. After the sign of the cross he kisses the paten, not in the middle, but on the border (8. B. C, 24th July, 1683), where it is not to touch the Sacred Host. Then, as he con- tinues, saying, ut ope misericordiw turn, he places the paten under the Host, being helped to that effect by the forefinger of the left hand. (Bub., ib.) Then, in the usual manner, he uncovers the chalice, and makes a genuflection. Hav- ing risen, he takes the Host with the thumb and forefinger of his right hand, raises it over the chalice, and with the help of the thumb and forefinger of his left hand cautiously and skilfully breaks it in the middle, commencing from the upper part, and saying in the meantime, Per eundem Domi- num Nostrum Jesum Christum Filium tuum.* Having di- vided the Host, he places the portion remaining in his right hand on the paten, still holding the other half over the chalice; then with the thumb and forefinger of his right hand, he breaks a small piece from the lower part of the second half, at the same time saying, Qui tecum vivit et reg- nat; and holding the small piece over the chalice, he places * To break it properly, it should be gently bent in and out two or three times, commencing at the top, then in the middle, and lastly at the end ; and returning to the middle, bent again carefully, till it be- comes divided.. In this manner there is less danger of causing small particles to break off. CEREMONIES OF LOW MASS. 27 the portion that is in his left hand on the paten, near the other half, saying, In unitate Spiritus Sancti Deus. Then, with his left hand, taking the chalice per nodum, he says in a loud voice, Per omnia scecula sceculorum. Amen being answered, he makes three crosses within the cup of the chalice with the small piece of the Host, saying, Pax Besides, two censers and incense-boat, a chafing-dish, with fire and tongs ; the torches and candles for the procession* 3. The altar must be undressed, having, however, six candlesticks, and candles of Unbleached wax, and the cross covered with a black veil, fastened in such a manner as to be easily and gradually taken off. 4. On the edge of the platform of the altar, three violet cushions, one on each side, and one in the middle, at a proper distance. 5. On the side-table, a plain linen cloth, projecting only a little on each side ; and on it the cruets in their plate ; an altar-card ; a Lavabo; a bookstand with the Missal for the celebrant; another Missal for the ministers; a folded altar-cloth, and a large black stole for the deacon ; a small vessel with water, covered with a purifier, for the ablution of the fingers in case th^ priest should touch the Blessed Sacrament; a black burse, containing a corporal, and a purifier on it ; a black veil for the chalice, two candlesticks with brown wax candles for the acolytes. The candles should not be lighted. 236 GOOD FRIDAY. 6. In any convenient place, the processional cross, cov- ered with a violet veil, and the wooden clapper. 7. At the Epistle side, in the sanctuary, a violet carpet, with a long white veil, and a violet cushion, on which the cross may be placed for the adoration. Also three book- stands for the Passion. The minister's bench must be without ornaments. 8. At the chapel of the repository, besides the canopy, the white veil on the side-table. On the altar, the key of the urn, or tabernacle ; and near the altar, the steps, etc. Article II. From the Vesting of the Ministers to the Uncovering of the Cross. 1. After the ministers are dressed, they proceed with the clergy to the sanctuary, as usual, except that the acolytes, without candlesticks, and with their hands joined, walk before the clergy. When they arrive at the altar, they make a genuflection and retire to their usual places. The ministers at the foot of the altar give their caps to the mas- ter of ceremonies, and make a genuflection with the cele- brant, without bowing to the clergy ; they prostrate them- selves, and lay their hands and faces on the cushions. 2. At the same time the clergy kneel down, and bow their heads ; the acolytes having knelt and made a short prayer, rise, and with the assistance of .the second master of ceremonies, extend on the altar a cloth, which should hang down only very little on each side ; then the acolytes go to their places ; and the master of ceremonies places on the Epistle side of the altar the bookstand, with the Missal open. 3. After a few minutes, the signal being given by the master of ceremonies, the sacred ministers and all the clergy rise. Immediately, the acolytes remove the cushions ; and the celebrant, with the deacon and sub-deacon, goes up to the altar ; the celebrant kisses it ; the deacon and sub- deacon make a genuflection, and they all go to the Epistle side, as for the Introit. VESTING — UNCOVERING OF CROSS. 237 4. At the same time, one of the acolytes receives the Missal from the second master of ceremonies, goes, accom- panied by him, to the middle of the altar, makes a genu- flection, bows to the clergy, goes to the place where the Epistle is usually sung, and there sings the lesson in the tone of the prophecies. At the beginning of it the clergy sit down, and the celebrant reads it with a low voice; the ministers do not answer, Deo gratias, at the end, but the celebrant immediately reads the Tract. 5. The acolyte having sung the prophecy, makes a genu- flection before the altar, bows to the clergy, and returns to his place. The singers chant the Tract, during which the celebrant and ministers may sit down.. 6. When the choir sing the words, Operuit c&los, the deacon and sub-deacon go, one after the other, behind the celebrant. In case they be sitting, they should first return to the altar by the shortest way. 7. After the Tract, the celebrant sings Oremus, and the deacon immediately subjoins, Fleetamus genua, kneeling, with all the clergy, the celebrant excepted ; then the sub- deacon answers, Levate, and all rise. 8. Whilst the celebrant sings the prayer, with his hands extended, the second acolyte helps the sub-deacon to take off his chasuble. The latter, having received the Missal from the second master of ceremonies, kneels before the altar, bows to the clergy, and sings the lesson, without the title, in the usual tone of the Epistle. 9. The lesson being ended, the sub-deacon kneels to the altar, bows to the clergy, and without asking the blessing from the celebrant, returns the Missal to the second master of ceremonies, puts on his chasuble, and returns to his place, as at the Introit. The celebrant having read the lesson with the Tract, goes with the ministers to sit down. 10. Whilst the Tract is sung, three book-stands are pre- pared for the Passion, and everything is done as directed in the fourth chapter, with the following exceptions : the celebrant reads all the Passion at the Epistle side, even that part which is sung in the tone of the Gospel ; saying before it, Munda cor meum, in the same place, but pro- foundly inclined, and omitting Jube Domne, etc. 238 GOOD FRIDAY. 11. After the Passion, those who sang it having returned to the sacristy, the sub-deacon goes down the step before the altar, and the deacon to the Epistle side ; the latter takes off his chasuble, puts on the large stole, and carries the Missal to the altar, making the usual bows and genu- flection. Then kneeling on the platform, he says, Munda cor meum, without asking the blessing ; he rises, takes the Missal, goes down the steps at the right of the sub-deacon, and after the usual genuflection and bows, goes to sing the Gospel, at which neither the censer nor the candlesticks are used. 12. The Gospel being sung, the sub-deacon does not carry the Missal to the celebrant, but shuts it, and gives it to the second master of ceremonies ; and all having made a genuflection in the middle, the acolytes go to their place ; the master of ceremonies lays the Missal on the table, and the ministers go, one after the other, behind the celebrant at the Epistle side. 13. Then the celebrant begins to sing the first preamble, with his hands joined ; at the end of it, he extends and joins them, bowing to the cross, and sings, Oremus; then the deacon adds, Flectamus genua, and the sub-deacon, Levate, as in n. 7. The celebrant immediately sings the prayer in the ferial tone, with his hands extended. All the following pream- bles and prayers are sung in the same manner. 14. At the prayer which begins with the words, Omni- potens sempiterne Bens, qui salvas, omnes, etc., the acolytes go to spread the violet carpet, covering the lowest step of the altar with one end of it, and extending the other on the floor of the sanctuary ; they also lay the cushion on the lowest step, and cover the whole with the white veil. 15. All the prayers being ended, the ministers go by the shortest way to the bench, where the celebrant and the sub-dea'con take off their chasubles, go to the Epistle side and stop before the lowest step, turned towards the people. 16. Then the master of ceremonies and the deacon go up to the altar, having first made a genuflection on the lowest step. The master of ceremonies takes the cross, and gives it to the deacon, who, having received it, rever- UNCOVERING OF THE CROSS. 239 ently carries it by the shortest way to the celebrant, having the image of the crucifix turned towards himself; the cele- brant receives it with great respect, holding the crucifix turned towards the people. Article III. From the Uncovering of the Cross to the Procession. 1. The celebrant, standing on the lowest step at the Epistle side, having the sub-deacon at his left, and the deacon at his right, turned towards the people, holds the cross in his left hand, and with the right uncovers the top of it, as far as the cross-piece, assisted, if necessary, by the ministers, raises it to the height of his eyes, and, with a grave and moderate voice, sings, Ecce lignum Crucis, from the book, which one of the acolytes holds open before him. 2. At these words, the clergy, having uncovered their heads, rise ; the celebrant, with the ministers and the aco- lytes, continues to sing the whole anthem. At the end of it, the choir and the clergy, kneeling on both knees, and bowing, answer, Venite adoremus. The ministers also and all the others, the celebrant excepted, kneel at the same time, and bow to the cross. 3. The words Venite adoremus being sung, the celebrant and the ministers ascend in the same order as before to the platform, and stop at the Epistle side. The celebrant uncovers the right arm and the head of the crucifix, and raising his voice one tone higher than the first time, sings, Ecce lignum, and everything is done as before. 4. Then the celebrant and the ministers go to the middle of the altar, in the same order ; there he uncovers the whole cross, giving the veil to the sub-deacon, who gives it to one of the acolytes, by whom it is placed on the side-table ; afterwards, raising his voice one tone higher, he sings, Ecce lignum, and the rest is done as above. 5. The clergy having risen, the celebrant, accompanied by the master of ceremonies, who raises his vestments as he goes up or down, carries the cross, without making any 240 GOOD FRIDAY. bow, to the place prepared for it, and kneeling, puts it on the cushion and veil ; then rises, makes a genuflection, and goes to the bench. 6. Whilst the celebrant kneels, the clergy rise, and the ministers, making a genuflection on the platform towards the cross, go by the shortest way to the bench. The second acolyte uncovers the processional cross, and another acolyte uncovers the other crosses that are in the church and in the sacristy, but not the images. 7. When the celebrant and ministers arrive at the bench, they take off their maniples and their shoes. The minis- ters remain at the bench, and the celebrant, attended by the master of ceremonies, goes to venerate* the cross. 8. Towards the extremity of the sanctuary, the cele- brant kneels before the cross, and makes a short prayer ; then rises, and about the middle of the sanctuary kneels again, and prays in the same manner ; he does the same for the third time at the foot of the cross, which he hum- bly kisses. Lastly, he rises, makes a genuflection to the cross, returns by the shortest way to the bench, puts on his shoes, with the assistance of the acolytes, and, assisted by the ministers, puts on his chasuble and maniple; then he sits down, and puts on his cap. 9. The ministers bow to the celebrant, and, attended by the second master of ceremonies, go to venerate the cross, observing what has been said in regard to the celebrant, n. 8. The deacon kisses the cross before the sub-deacon. 10. After the ministers, the clergy go, two by two, first the priests, then those in inferior orders ; and lastly, the laymen, if custom allows them to enter the sanctuary. Otherwise, a priest, with a surplice and a black stole, carries another crucifix to some other place for the vene- ration of the people, laying it on the cushion, as above, and the same priest removes it, if it be in the way of the procession. Another method might be followed where the congre- gation is very numerous, viz., that one or two clergymen, * The; technical term is adoration ; but to prevent misconception, wo use the one less likely to be misinterpreted. UNCOVERING OF THE CROSS. 241 in surplice and stole, should present the crucifix to be kissed at the railing. 11. During the whole time of the veneration of the cross, the choir sings the Improperia. It is not necessary to con- tinue them after it, nor to sing them all, 12. The ministers having returned to the bench, put on their shoes and maniples; the sub-deacon resumes also his chasuble, and both sit down at the side of the celebrant. Then one of the acolytes brings the Missal from the table, bows to the celebrant, opens it at the place where the Improperia are found, and holds it so that the celebrant and the ministers may read them alternately. 13. When the acolytes have venerated the cross, the first of them lights the candles on the table and on the altar, and the second goes to hold the Missal before the ministers in the place of the censer-bearer, till they have finished the Improperia; then he shuts it, bows to the celebrant, puts it on the table, and returns to his place. The censer-bearers having venerated the cross, the second of them goes to assist the cross-bearer to put on the amice, alb, cincture, and chasuble, and the first prepares the censers. If there be no sub -deacon besides the one that ministers to the celebrant, any acolyte dressed in surplice may carry the cross. 14. Towards the end of the veneration, the deacon rises, bows to the celebrant, and carries to the altar the burse with the corporal and purifier. When he has reached the platform he kneels to the cross, unfolds the corporal as usual, and places the purifier near it, at the Epistle side. At the same time the master of ceremonies carries the Missal with its stand to the Gospel side, kneeling to the cross. The deacon having unfolded the corporal, makes a genuflection to the cross, and returns by the shortest way to the right of the celebrant, sits down and covers his head. 15. After the veneration, the deacon, invited by the master of ceremonies, takes oif his cap, rises, bows to the celebrant, and attended by the master of ceremonies, goes to the place in which the cross was laid, makes a genuflec- tion, takes it up with both his hands, and assisted by the 21 242 GOOD FRIDAY. master of ceremonies, carries it to the altar, and places it between the candlesticks, makes a genuflection, and returns to the side of the celebrant.^ At the same time the cele- brant, the sub-deacon, and all the clergy kneel down at their places. 16. Then the celebrant, ministers, and clergy rise, and sit down. In the meanwhile an acolyte removes the veil, cushion, and carpet. Article IV. Of the Procession. 1. The cross being placed on the altar by the deacon, the censer-bearers go to the middle of the sanctuary, fol- lowed by the cross-bearer, who walks between the acolytes with the candlesticks ; only the censer-bearers make a genuflection; then they all proceed to the repository by the shortest way ; the clergy follow them, first those in inferior orders, then the priests, lastly the ministers, one after the other, with their hands joined and their caps on, all making a genuflection before the cross. 2. On arriving at the repository, the censer-bearers make a genuflection in the middle on both knees, and retire to the Epistle side ; the cross-bearer and the acolytes stop at the entrance of the chapel on the Epistle side, as yesterday ; all the others, after making a genuflection on both knees, place themselves as yesterday. 3. The sacred ministers, at the entrance of the reposi- tory, give their caps to the master of ceremonies, who gives them to an acolyte to carry to the sanctuary, and place them on the bench of the ministers. Then the dea- con passes to the right, and the sub-deacon to the left of the celebrant. When they arrive before the altar, they make a genuflection on both knees, rise, kneel on the lowest step of the altar, and pray for a few moments ; in the mean- time candles are distributed to the clergy, w r ho light them. 4. The signal being given by the master of ceremonies, the deacon rises, makes a genuflection, and goes to open the urn, or tabernacle, and having made another genuflection, BRINGING BACK THE BLESSED SACRAMENT. 243 returns to the right of the celebrant, who puts incense in both censers without blessing, and kneeling with the minis- ters, incenses the Blessed Sacrament. The canopy is given to be carried either to priests dressed in surplice, or to other persons, according to custom. 5. After the incensing of the Blessed Sacrament, the master of ceremonies puts the veil on the shoulders of the celebrant ; the deacon takes the Blessed Sacrament from the urn, and gives it to the celebrant, as on yesterday, w 7 ho, having covered it with the lower parts of the veil, turns towards the people, having the deacon on his right and the sub-deacon on his left hand. The singers, still kneeling, intone Vexilla Regis, etc. The procession moves off ; first, the cross-bearer with the acolytes, without making any genuflection ; then the others, who make a genuflection as yesterday. When they are arrived at the sanctuary, the cross-bearer leaves the cross at the Epistle side, makes a genuflection, and goes to the sacristy to take off the sacred vestments. The clergy, on arriving at the sanctuary, go to their place, and remain there kneeling. 6. The sacred ministers having arrived at the high altar, the deacon receives the Blessed Sacrament from the cele- brant, and having placed it on the corporal, unties the ribbon, and extends the veil, as at the beginning of Mass ; then he makes a genuflection, and returns to the right of the celebrant, from whose shoulders the veil should have been removed in the meantime by the sub-deacon. Incense is put into the censer, and the Blessed Sacrament should be incensed as usual. 7. The clergymen who carried the canopy leave it aside, take candles, and kneel down before the altar, forming a semicircle, till after the communion. If the canopy is car- ried by laymen, they remain kneeling at the rails, holding lighted candles in their hands. 8. The censer-bearers, after the incensing, make a genu- flection on both knees in the middle, and the second of them goes to the sacristy ; the first remains at the Epistle side. 244 GOOD FRIDAY. Article V. Of the remaining part of the Office. 1. When the celebrant has incensed the Blessed Sacra- ment, he goes up to the altar with the ministers. They make a genuflection, bending one knee ; the deacon takes the veil from the chalice, and gives it to the master of ceremonies; he removes also the paten and the pall from the chalice. Then he takes the paten with his right hand, raises it a little from the corporal, and the celebrant, taking the chalice, lets the consecrated Host fall gently on the paten, taking care not to touch it ; but should he happen to do so, he washes his fingers in the small vase prepared for this purpose, and the deacon presents to him the purifier. Then the celebrant receives with both his hands the paten from the deacon, who kisses neither it nor the celebrant's hand ; and without making any cross, or saying anything, the celebrant places the Host on the corporal, laying the paten also on the corporal at the Epistle side. 2. The Host being placed on the corporal, the sub-deacon makes a genuflection, goes to the right of the deacon, makes another genuflection, and, receiving the cruets from an acolyte, takes that which contains wine, and gives it to the deacon, who puts some of the wine into the chalice, taking care not to place it on the altar, nor to wipe it with the purifier. Then the sub-deacon puts a little water into the chalice, without asking the blessing of the celebrant, who does not give it, nor say the prayer, Deus qui humance, etc. This done, the acolyte carries back the cruets to the side- table; the sub-deacon goes to the left of the celebrant, making the usual genuflections, and the deacon presents the chalice, without kissing it, to the celebrant, who, with- out making any cross, or saying any prayer, places it on the corporal, and it is covered with the pall by the deacon. 3. Then the censer-bearer, having made a genuflection below the steps, goes to the platform, and the incense is put into the censer as usual, but without blessing or kissing the censer, or the hand of the celebrant. The sacred obla- tions are incensed as usual, with the words, Incensum istud ; REMAINING PART OF THE OFFICE. 245 likewise, the cross and the altar, with the customary genu- flections, and with the words, Dirigatur Domine, etc., Ac- cendat, etc. At the Epistle corner the deacon receives the censer from the celebrant, and gives it to the censer-bearer, who carries it to the sacristy, as it is not used again.* 4. The celebrant, having given the censer to the deacon, descends one step on the Epistle side, turned towards the people, and washes his hands, the sub-deacon pouring the water, and the deacon presenting him the towel ; the psalm, Lavabo, is not said ; the celebrant and the ministers go to the middle of the altar, and the acolytes carry every- thing back to the side-table. 5. The celebrant and ministers arriving at the middle, make a genuflection ; the deacon goes to the left of the celebrant, near the Missal, and the celebrant, placing his hands joined on the altar, and bowing, says with a low but audible voice the prayer, In spiritu humilitatis, etc. He then kisses the altar, makes a genuflection, and turning his face towards the people, and his back to the Gospel side, says, Orate fratres; he continues what follows in a low voice, and without going round, returns to the middle. The ministers do not answer, Suscipiat, etc. 6. The celebrant having said the Orate fratres, etc., sings, in a ferial tone, Or emus : Prceceptis salutaribus moniti, with his hands joined, and the Pater noster with his hands extended. At the beginning of the Pater, the deacon makes a genuflection, and goes behind the celebrant. The master of ceremonies takes his place by the Missal. 7. At the end of the Pater noster the choir answers, Sed libera nos a malo, and the celebrant says, in a low voice, Amen, continuing to hold his hands extended, and not sign- ing himself with the paten. Then he subjoins in the same tone of voice, Libera nos qucesumus Domine, etc. After which, the choir answers, Amen. 8. The celebrant makes a genuflection, places the paten under the Host, and holding with his left hand the paten on the altar, with his right raises the Host, so that it may be seen by all ; without, however, taking it out of the limits of the corporal. In the meanwhile the ministers kneel on * The deacon does not incense the celebrant. 246 GOOD FKIDAY. the platform ; they do not raise the lower part of the cele- brant's chasuble; the Blessed Sacrament is not incensed. One of the acolytes sounds the clapper. 9. Whilst the celebrant lays the Host on the paten, the ministers rise, go to his side, and with him make a genu- flection. Then the deacon uncovers the chalice, the cele- brant takes the Host, divides it as usual into three parts, without making the sign of the cross, or saying anything, and places the smallest part in the chalice. 10. The deacon having covered the chalice, the celebrant, with the ministers, make a genuflection. The ministers change places, and make another genuflection. Then the celebrant, omitting the Agnus Dei and the first two prayers before the communion, says only the third, which begins, Perceptio Corporis, etc., holding his hands joined on the altar; when he has finished the prayer, he makes a genu- flection, with the ministers, and rising says, Partem cmlestem, then takes the paten and Host, and communicates, having previously said, as usual, Domine, non sum dignus. 11. After the communion of the Sacred Body, the sub- deacon uncovers the chalice, the celebrant and ministers make a genuflection, the fragments are collected and put into the chalice by the celebrant, who, without saying any- thing, or making the sign of the cross, consumes the wine with the consecrated Particle, the ministers in the mean- time bowing profoundly. 12. One of the acolytes carries the cruets to the altar; the sub-deacon gives the wine and water to the celebrant, who takes the usual ablutions without saying anything. In the meantime the clergy sit down, and put out their candles. 13. After the ablution, the ministers change places, making a genuflection as they pass by the middle; the sub-deacon goes to the Missal, and the deacon to the side- table ; where, having taken off the large stole, and put on the folded chasuble, he returns to the platform at the right of the celebrant; who, having taken the last ablution, says in the middle, with a low voice, with his head inclined, and with his hands joined before his breast, the prayer, Quod ore sumpsimus. The sub-deacon, as usual, wipes the HOLY SATURDAY. 247 chalice, and covers it with the veil, which one of the aco- lytes must have brought to the altar, and carries it to the side- table, making a genuflection to the cross as he passes by the middle; then he returns to the left of the celebrant, and closes the Missal. 14. The signal being given by the master of ceremonies, the celebrant and the ministers bow to the cross, go down to the foot of the altar, make a genuflection, together with the master of ceremonies, and the acolytes, who do not carry the candlesticks ; and, having bowed to the clergy, put on their caps and go to the sacristy, where they take off the sacred vestments. 15. The sacred ministers having left the sanctuary, Ves- pers are recited as yesterday. In the meantime, the censer- bearers remove from the altar the book-stand with the Missal, and the towel, so that it be left quite bare, with no other ornament than the cross and the six candlesticks. They carry everything to the sacristy. 16. After Vespers, the clergy make a genuflection to the cross, and return to the sacristy. Then the candles on the altar are extinguished. CHAPTER VIII. HOLY SATURDAY. Article I. Things to be Prepared. 1. At a convenient and proper time, the church is adorned with white and precious ornaments. The high altar is prepared as on the greatest solemnities. The relic- cases may be placed between the candlesticks, when the ministers put on white vestments. A white altar-veil should be under another of violet color, which is to be re- moved only before the beginning of Mass ; at that time, also, the carpet should be placed on the platform and steps 248 HOLY SATURDAY. of the altar, which, during the first part of the sacred office, should be left bare. 2. The lamps of the church should be so prepared as to be easily lighted at the proper time. The images of the church should be kept covered till the beginning of the litany. The tabernacle should have a white canopy under another of violet color, which latter ought to be removed when the violet veil is taken away from the front of the altar. 3. In the sacristy, the sacred vestments of violet color for the ministers, viz., a cope, stole, cincture, alb, and amice for the celebrant ; two folded chasubles, with two maniples, a stole, two cinctures, albs, and amices for the ministers. Under the same, or in any other place, the usual white vestments for the celebrant and the ministers. The censer with the incense-boat, the vase for the holy water with the sprinkle, a plate with five large grains of incense, the processional cross, the candlesticks, with white candles for the acolytes. 4. At the baptismal font, everything should be cleaned; any water remaining there ought to be put into the piscina. A table is to be placed near it, and covered with a linen cloth ; on it the vessels containing the oil of catechumens, and the sacred chrism in a plate ; a vessel with water, and a basin; a towel on a plate; some slices of bread and lemon, likewise on a plate; some cotton on another plate; an empty vessel for holy water, with the sprinkle. If it is customary to distribute among the people the water blessed on this day, a large vessel might be prepared and adorned before the baptismal font, and filled with water, which is, in that case, blessed; before the oils are mixed with the water, the baptismal fonts are filled with part of the water blessed in the large vessel, and then the oils are put into the water contained in the baptismal fonts, not into that contained in the large vessel. Some small vessels ought to be prepared to take the water from the large vessel, to put it into the fonts. 5. The bench of the ministers must be adorned as on the greatest solemnities, and covered with a violet cloth, which is removed when the ministers change their vestments. BENEDICTION OF THE FIRE. 249 On this second cloth is to be placed the violet chasuble and maniple for the celebrant, also another violet maniple for the deacon, and a cap for the sub-deacon. 6. At the Gospel side, if there is a pulpit, the Exultet should be sung there; if not, a book-stand must be pre- pared ; and either the pulpit or book-stand must be covered with a white veil, and a cushion placed on it for the, Exultet. On the same side should be a stand for the Paschal candle, and there also near the altar the Paschal candle itself; also a stand for the triple candle, and, on the Epistle side, a book-stand, uncovered, for the prophecies. 7. On the side- table, everything necessary for High Mass ; the burse and veil of the chalice, and over them the white veil, which must be covered with another violet veil. Near the table, three violet cushions for the ministers dur- ing the litany. 8. In the porch, or if the church have none, in any other convenient place, a table covered with a white linen cloth, and on it a white dalmatic, stole, and maniple for the dea- con, a violet maniple for the sub-deacon, a Missal, a plate containing a small candle, and matches to light it. 9. A large chafing-pan, with pieces of dry wood so ar- ranged that fire may be easily lighted, which must be done before the ceremony, and be struck from a flint ; near it, tongs to put the new fire into the censer. 10. Near the table, the triple candle on its rod, adorned with flowers, at the place the stock of the candle is con- nected with the rod. The candle is to be made so as to have one common stock, out of which proceed three branches at the same distance from each other. Article II. From the Benediction of the New Fire to the Exultet. 1. The sacred ministers being vested as in chap, iv, with this difference only, that they do not wear their maniples, and the signal being given by the master of ceremonies, the sub-deacon takes the processional cross, and the pro- cession for the benediction of the new fire is arranged in the following order : first, three acolytes ; the one who 250 HOLY SATTJKDAY. is in the middle carries the vessel with holy water, and the sprinkle ; the one at the right carries the plate with the five grains of incense, and the one at the left carries the censer without fire, and the boat Avith incense, and the small spoon within it. The sub-deacon follows, carrying the cross ; after him the clergy, two by two ; lastly, the celebrant, with the deacon at his left. The latter, with all the clergy, must have their heads uncovered. As they pass before the cross of the high altar, they all make a genuflection, with the exception of the cross-bearer and the celebrant ; the latter only bows to the cross. 2. When the procession arrives at the porch, the sab- deacon places himself by the table, turning his back to the door, or to the walls of the church, holding the cross, with the image of the crucifix turned towards the celebrant. The clergy divide into two lines, on each side of the sub- deacon, so that the highest in dignity amongst them may be nearest to the celebrant, who places himself opposite the cross, with the deacon at his right. The deacon receives the cap from the celebrant, kissing his hand and the cap, and assists him in raising the border of his cope when he makes the sign of the cross, or uses the sprinkle or the censer, and turning the leaves of the book. 3. The first acolyte having placed on the table the vase with holy water, takes the Missal, and holds it open before the celebrant. The two other acolytes stand at the right of the deacon, but a little behind him, and the master of ceremonies at the left of the celebrant. 4. All being so arranged, the celebrant, with his hands joined, says, in a ferial tone, Dominus vobiscum, and the three prayers that follow, for the benediction of the new fire, which is to be made before any other. (Deer. S. R. C.j 12th April, 1755.) At the end of each prayer the clergy answer, Amen. 5. Then the acolyte who holds the plate with the grains of incense comes before the celebrant, who says the fourth prayer for the blessing of tho five grains of incense ; and in the meanwhile the censer-bearer puts some of the new fire into the censer, and returns to his place. 6. After the fourth prayer, the first acolyte shuts the BENEDICTION OF THE FIRE. 251 book, and having placed it on the table, takes the vase with holy water, and joins the other acolytes. The cele- brant puts incense as usual into the censer, and blesses it, saying, Ab illo benedicaris, etc. Then the deacon, having received from the first acolyte the sprinkle, kisses it, and gives it to the celebrant, kissing his hand ; the celebrant thrice sprinkles, first the five grains of incense, then the fire, saying, Asperges me, without the Psalm and Gloria Patri, and having received the censer, incenses likewise, first the five grains, then the fire. 7. After the incensing, the first acolyte leaves the holy- water vase on the table, and with one of the matches pre- pared for that purpose lights the small candle from the new fire ; the second acolyte, laying the plate w r ith the five grains of incense on the table, together with the second master of ceremonies, assists the deacon to take off his violet vestments, and put on the white, and carries the maniple to the sub-deacon, who puts it on. Then he takes again the plate with the five grains, and returns to the right of the censer-bearer. 8. The deacon having put on the white vestments, goes to the right of the celebrant, to assist at the blessing of the incense for the procession and the Exultet, which is per- formed as usual. Then he takes the triple candle with both his hands, and at a signal given by the master of ceremonies, the procession advances in the following order : 9. First the censer-bearer, slowly moving his censer, and at his right the second acolyte, who carries the five grains of incense; the sub-deacon follows with the cross; then the clergy, two by two ; after them the deacon, car- rying the triple candle, having at his left the first acolyte, with the lighted candle ; last of all, the celebrant, with his hands joined, and near him the master of ceremonies; all walk with their heads uncovered, the celebrant alone excepted. 10. During the procession, an acolyte carries the cap and the violet vestments of the deacon to the bench of the ministers, and the other things to the sacristy. 11. As the celebrant enters the church, the second mas- ter of ceremonies gives a signal to the clergy to stop ; and 252 HOLY SATURDAY. the deacon bends the rod of the triple candle towards the first acolyte, who lights one of the three candles ; then the deacon raises the rod, and bends one knee, and all the clergy do the same, the cross-bearer excepted ; the celebrant uncovers his head before he makes the genuflection. The deacon sings Lumen Christi, in such a tone of voice that it- may be raised a tone higher twice, and the clergy answer, Deo gratias. Then they all rise, and the procession con- tinues to advance. When they reach the middle of the church, the same ceremony is again performed ; and it is repeated the third time before the steps of the altar. 12. After the Deo gratias has been answered for the third time by the clergy, they all go to their places. On arriving before the altar, the censer-bearer stops at the Gospel side, the acolyte, with the grains of incense, at the Epistle side, and the cross-bearer at the right of the censer- bearer. The first acolyte, having extinguished the small candle, receives the triple candle from the deacon, and places himself at the left of the second acolyte ; and the deacon, retiring a little towards the Gospel side, and turn- ing from his right side, makes room for the celebrant, who goes up to the platform, and stands at the Epistle corner. Article III. From the Exultet to the Prophecies. 1. The celebrant, on arriving at the Epistle side, turns towards the altar ; the second master of ceremonies gives the Missal to the deacon, who, kneeling on the platform, without saying Munda cor meum, asks as usual the bless- ing of the celebrant, who gives it, saying as usual, Domine sit in corde tuo, etc., but instead of saying Evangelium suum, says, Suum paschale prceconium, making the usual sign of the cross, but without giving his hand to be kissed. 2. The deacon having received the blessing, goes down to the foot of the altar, between the cross-bearer and the acolyte who carries the triple candle, where, having made a genuflection with the acolytes (the cross-bearer should not make it), and bowed to the clergy, they go, one after PROPHECIES. 203 the other, to the place prepared at the Gospel side, and place themselves in the following order : the deacon in the middle, having at his right the snb-deacon, who turns the image of the crucifix towards the celebrant, and the censer- bearer ; and at his left hand having the acolyte with the triple candle, and the acolyte with the grains of incense. The master of ceremonies places himself behind the deacon, who, with all the others, are turned towards the book. 3. When they have arrived at the book-stand, and placed themselves in the order a-lready mentioned, the dea- con lays the book upon it, and opens it; then, without making the sign of the cross on himself, and without say- ing Dominus vobiscum, he incenses it as for the Gospel, and, with his hands joined, he sings the JExuItet; during which the clergy remain standing, as also the celebrant, who turns towards the deacon. 4. The deacon having said the w T ords, Curvat imperia, stops, the clergy sit down, but not the celebrant, and the acolyte who holds the plate with the five grains approaches the deacon, who, assisted by the master of ceremonies, goes with them to place the five grains in the Paschal candle (which one of the acolytes holds), in the form of a cross, in this order, 1 which being done, they return to their place, and 4 2 5 the clergy rise. The acolyte places the plate in 3 which were the five grains on the side- table, and takes a small candle not lighted. 5. The deacon having returned to the Missal, continues the Exuttet, and having sung the words Rutilans ignis accendit, the clergy sit down ; he goes with the acolyte that carries the triple candle, to light the Paschal candle with one of them, and returns to continue the Exultet. The clergy rise. 6. The acolyte places the triple candle on the stand pre- pared for it near the altar, and the Paschal candle is fixed in its candlestick, so that the cross be turned towards the celebrant. 7. The deacon having sung the words, Apis mater eduxit, stops awhile, and the first acolyte lights his small candle, either from the Paschal candle or from the triple candle, and lights the lamps of the sanctuary ; the deacon continues the Exultet, and bows at the name of the Pope. 254 HOLY SATURDAY. 8. After the Fxultet, the clergy sit down ; the sub-deacon leaves the cross at its place, the deacon immediately shuts the Missal, and leaves it on the stand, and both, with their hands joined, make a genuflection in the middle, and go to the bench — the celebrant also going thither at the same time ; the latter, assisted by the sub-deacon, takes off his cope, and puts on the violet maniple and chasuble. 9. The deacon, assisted by the first acolyte, takes off his white vestments, and puts on violet ; then the celebrant and the ministers go by the shortest way to the Epistle side, as for the Introit. The second master of ceremonies prepares, in the middle of the sanctuary, a book-stand without any covering, and a Missal on it for the prophecies. Article IV. From the Prophecies to the Benediction of the Baptismal Font. 1. When the ministers have arrived at the Epistle side, the second master of ceremonies invites the clergyman who is to sing the first prophecy, as in chapter v, except that, before he leaves the book-stand with the clergyman, he waits till the deacon has said, Flectamus genua (when there is no Tract), then they make a genuflection, with all the clergy, and rise at the word Levate. Whilst the celebrant sings the prayer, the second master of ceremonies invites him who is to sing the second prophecy, doing as has been already said ; and so likewise for all the other prophecies. 2. The clergy sit down whilst the prophecies are sung, rise at the prayers ; the celebrant reads the prophecies in a low voice, and sings the prayers in .a ferial tone, with his hands extended, the ministers standing behind him, one after the other ; and the deacon, immediately after the cele- brant has said, Oremus, sings, Flectamus genua, and the sub-deacon, Levate. After the prayers, the ministers go up near the celebrant, as for the Introit. 3. After the last prophecy and prayer, the second master of ceremonies removes from the middle of the sanctuary the book-stand with the Missal, and the celebrant, with BENEDICTION OF THE BAPTISMAL FONTS. 255 the ministers, go by the shortest way to the bench, where the celebrant, assisted by the ministers, takes off his maniple and chasuble, and puts on the cope; and the ministers take off their maniples. Article V. From the beginning of the Benediction of the Baptismal Font, to the beginning of Mass.* 1. The first acolyte, after the celebrant has put on his cope, takes the Paschal candle from its candlestick, and goes with it to the middle of the sanctuary ; likewise the sub-deacon takes the cross, and places himself immediately before the first acolyte ; the celebrant, with the deacon on his left, goes before the steps of the altar, in the middle. At a signal given by the master of ceremonies, the first acolyte makes a genuflection, turns towards the people, and walks slowly to the baptismal fonts ; the sub-deacon carry- ing the cross, without making the genuflection, follows him; then the singers; and after them the rest of the clergy make a genuflection in the middle, and follow them ; last of all, the celebrant, with his head covered, and the deacon at his left, accompanied by the master of ceremonies. On the way, the tract, Sicut cervus, is sung by the choir. Arrived at the font, the cross-bearer stops at one side, near the door or entry, the first acolyte at his left ; the clergy divide into two lines, those in inferior orders remaining near the door, and those in higher dignity near the font. Before the celebrant enters, he stops, takes off his cap, and the second acolyte bringing and holding before him the Missal, he says, in a ferial tone, Dominus vobiseum, etc., and the following prayer. Then he goes, with the deacon at his left, to the font, and places himself so as to be turned towards the cross, and the clergy. The second acolyte fol- lows him with the Missal, and having opened it, the cele- brant begins the blessing of the font, saying, in a ferial tone, Dominus vobiseum, with the following prayers ; in concluding it, he sings, Per omnia scecula, in the tone of * This article has been added by the translator. 256 HOLY SATURDAY. the ferial preface, with what follows ; after the Avords, G-ra- tiam de Spiritu Sancto, the celebrant divides the water in form of a cross, the deacon holding up the side of his cope, and offering him the towel to wipe his hands, which one of the acolytes should have brought on a plate. 2. After the words, Inficiendo corrumpat, the celebrant touches the water with his right hand, which he afterwards wipes, as before. At the words Per Deum 4" vivum, Per Deum *fr verum, Per Deum «f* sanctum, he makes the sign of the cross three times on the water. After the words Super teferebatur, he divides the water with his hand, and throws some of it out, towards the four parts of the world, in this form, 1 after the words Benignus adspira, he breathes thrice 3 4 upon the water, in the form of a cross. At the words 2 Jlentlbus efficaces, the first acolyte car- ries the Paschal candle to the deacon, that he may give it to the celebrant, w T ho dips it into the water at three different times, but each successive time he dips it deeper, and sings, one tone higher, the w T ords Descended in hanc. Then breathing thrice upon the water in this form >f< he goes on with the Preface. After the words Fcecundet effectu, the Paschal candle is taken out of the water, wiped, and given back to the first acolyte, who goes to his place near the cross-bearer. The celebrant continues what follows in the tone of the Preface, as far as the words Per Dominum, ex- clusively, which, with the following words, he only recites ; the minister answers, Amen. Then the people are sprinkled with water taken out of the font by a priest in surplice and stole. If the water is blessed in another vessel, the font is filled with it ; but if it is blessed in the font, some of it is taken out to satisfy the devotion of the people, and to bless their houses and other places. - 3. After this, the celebrant receives from the deacon the oil of the catechumens, and pours some of it into the baptismal font, in form of a cross, saying, Sctndijicetur, etc. The ministers answer, Amen. Then he pours the chrism into it, in the same manner, saying, Infuslo, etc.; the min- isters answering also, Amen. Lastly, lie pours the oil and chrism both together into the water, in the form of a cross, saying. Commixtio, etc.; and the ministers answer, Amen. BENEDICTION OF THE BAPTISMAL FONTS. 257 Then he mingles the oil with the water, and with his hand spreads it all over the font. This done, two acolytes bring everything necessary to wash the hands, also the slices of bread and lemon prepared on a plate ; the celebrant, assisted by the deacon, washes and wipes his hands. 4. If any are to be baptized, they are solemnly baptized by the celebrant, as in the ritual. After the blessing of the font, they return to the high altar in the same order in which they came. Arrived there, the first acolyte makes a genuflection, replaces the Paschal candle on its candle- stick, and goes to the side-table, near which the cross- bearer leaves the cross, and goes to the bench. The clergy, having made a genuflection in the middle, go to their places and sit down. The celebrant having bowed, and the deacon having made a genuflection, go to the bench, where the celebrant, assisted by the ministers, takes off his cope, who also take off their chasubles, and, having bowed to the clergy, go to the altar. In the meanwhile, the acolytes should place on the border of the platform three violet cushions at equal distance ; the celebrant and the minis- ters, having made the usual reverence to the cross, pros- trate themselves, laying their hands and their heads on them. The clergy kneel down. The acolytes carry the chasubles to the sacristy. 5. Two chanters, kneeling before two stools, behind the ministers, in the middle of the choir, begin to sing the Litany of the Saints, and the clergy repeat the same words sung by the chanters. The master of ceremonies and aco^ lytes kneel by the steps of the altar. 6. Whilst the chanters sing Peccatorcs, which, with the rest of the Litany, ought to be sung very slowly, to give time to prepare what is necessary, the celebrant, the min- isters, and the acolytes, at a signal given by the master of ceremonies, rise ; the ministers receive their caps from him, and having made a genuflection (the celebrant bowing) to the cross, and bowed to the clergy, go to the sacristy ; the acolytes walking first, then the ministers, and lastly the celebrant, one after another, with their heads covered ; there they take off their violet stoles, and put on the white vestments. 22 258 HOLY SATURDAY. 7. After the ministers have left the sanctuary, the aco- lytes appointed for it remove the cushions and the violet altar-veil and canopy from the altar, the violet veil from the side-table, and the violet cloth from the bench of the ministers; they also spread the carpet on the platform and steps of the altar, light the candles on the altar, and un- cover the images in the church. In the sacristy, the aco- lytes light their candles, and the censer-bearer puts fire into the censer. Article VI. The Mass. 1. When the chanters have come to the Agnus Dei, or thereabouts, according to the greater or less distance of the sacristy from the altar, the ministers, preceded by the acolytes with their candles lighted, walk towards the altar, so as to be in the sanctuary at the end of Exaudi nos; which, being repeated by the choir, the clergy rise, the chanters go to the desk, to sing the Kyrie in a slow and solemn manner, as the ministers enter the sanctuary (be- cause to-day the Kyrie takes the place of the Introit, which the singers should not begin to sing before the ministers have arrived at the sanctuary). (Deer. S. R. G, 14 Apr., 1753.) The ministers bow, as usual, to the clergy, make a genuflection (the celebrant profoundly bowing) to the cross, and Mass is begun. 2. Mass to-day goes on as usual, till the end of the celebrant's communion inclusively, with the following ex- ceptions: the psalrn, Juclica me, with the Gloria Patri, is resumed. After the incensing there is no Introit, but the sacred ministers say, as usual, Kyrie eleison. 3. The celebrant having sung the words, Gloria in exeelsis Deo, the first acolyte rings the bell by the side-table, the second rings another in the sacristy, and the large bells of the church are also rung, whilst the sacred ministers continue the Gloria to its end. At the same time the organ is played, as usual. 4. The celebrant having given the blessing to the sub- THE MASS. 259 deacon after the Epistle, sings thrice, Alleluia, raising every time his voice one tone higher; and the choir repeats it after each time in the same tone, the ministers standing by the celebrant, as for the Introit, who, having read the Tract, goes to read the Gospel, as usual. 5. The acolytes, at the Gospel, go as usual with the min- isters, but do not carry their candlesticks. The Credo is not said, neither the Offertory, nor the Agnus Dei; the Pax is not given. 6. The deacon, having covered the chalice after the celebrant has put into it the small particle of the conse- crated Host, immediately changes places with the sub- deacon. 7. According to the decree of the S. C. R., 22 Mar., 1806, Communion may be given to the faithful at this Mass, by which, in parochial churches, they fulfil the paschal pre- cept. If it be given, the deacon and sub-deacon do not exchange places, and everything for the Communion should be done as on Holy Thursday. 8. After the Communion of the celebrant, the censer- bearer goes to prepare the censer, puts fire into it, and the choir, instead of the Communio, sing Alleluia, and the psalm, Laudate Dominion, etc. 9. The celebrant, having taken the last ablution, goes to the Epistle side, where he recites in a low voice the Alleluia, and the psalm, Laudate Dominum, alternately with the ministers who are near him, placed in the same position as at the Introit. The choir having repeated the anthevn Alleluia, the celebrant intones Vespere autem Sab- bati, and, with the ministers, continues it to the end, in a low voice, whilst the choir sing it. 10. When the chanters begin the Magnificat, the cele- brant and the ministers make the sign of the cross, and go to the middle of the altar, the sub-deacon at the left and the deacon at the right of the celebrant, where he presents the incense. Then the altar is incensed, as usual at Ves- pers. 11. The deacon having incensed the celebrant, goes to incense the clergy, as usual. In the meantime, the cele- brant and the sub-deacon remain at the Epistle side, as at 260 HOLY SATURDAY. the Introit After the clergy, the sub-deacon is incensed by the deacon, for which purpose the sub-deacon turns towards him, without, however, turning his back to the celebrant. Then the deacon goes to the place where he usually stands at the Introit, and turns to the censer-bearer, who incenses him ; he also incenses the acolytes and the people. Afterwards he takes the censer to the sacristy, and returns to the altar. 12. The antiphon, Vesper e autem, etc., being repeated by the choir, the celebrant goes to the middle, the ministers following him, one after the other, kisses the altar, says Dominus vobiscum, and finishes the Mass as usual. The deacon sings, Ite, Missa est, Alleluia, Alleluia, PART V. Ceremonies for Jjjftass and ©capera. SOLEMNLY CELEBRATED BY THE BISHOP, OR IN HIS PRESENCE. CHAPTER I. SOLEMN PONTIFICAL VESPEES. Aeticle I. Things to be Prepared. 1. The altar is to be covered with a long veil, which should not hang down before it, but only on the two sides. In the middle of the altar are placed the sacred vestments for the Bishop, viz., the amice, alb, cincture, stole, and cope ; on the Epistle side, the ornamented mitre ; on that of the Gospel, the golden mitre ; on the highest step near the Epistle corner, the crosier, and near the vestments, on the Gospel side, on a small plate, the pectoral cross and the ring. 2. On the side-table, the two candlesticks for the aco- lytes, the Missal for the prayers to be sung by the Bishop, and the hand-candlestick. 3. In the middle of the sanctuary, two or four stools for the cope-bearers, according to their number. 4. In the sacristy, a cope for the assistant priest ; two dalmatics, stoles, albs, cinctures, and amices for the assist- 262 PONTIFICAL VESPERS. ant deacons ; two or four copes for the chanters, according to their number ; and a sufficient number of copes, chasu- bles, and dalmatics, with amices, albs, cinctures, etc., for the clergy who assist at Vespers, dressed according to their order. 5. In a convenient place, the censer with the incense- boat, a chafing-dish, with fire and tongs. Article II. From the entrance of the Bishop and Clergy into the Church, to the Beginning of Vespers. 1. The Bishop, preceded by the clergy, two by two, goes from the sacristy to the church, the assistant priest walking immediately before him, and the two deacons at his side ; having adored the Blessed Sacrament, he goes up to his seat. There he sits for a short time; then rising, he takes off his cape,* and puts on the amice, alb, cincture, pectoral cross, stole, and cope ; he sits down, the first deacon puts the mitre on his head, and the assistant priest the ring on his finger. 2. Being thus vested, and having sat for awhile, his mitre is taken off by the second deacon. The Bishop then rises, and with him all the clergy ; he turns towards the altar, and says, secretly, Pater and Jive; then, making the sign of the cross on himself, he sings, Deus in adjutoriwn meum intende. Whilst the choir sings Gloria Patri, the Bishop and all the clergy bow towards the altar. Article III. From the Beginning to the End of Vespers. 1. In the meanwhile, two or four chanters in copes, ac- companied by the second master of ceremonies, make the usual genuflection and bows, go to the Bishop's seat, and the first among them gives the tone of the first antiphon * The technical name is mozetta. It is regarded as a mark of juris- diction, and is therefore only to be worn by the diocesan, unless in Councils. PONTIFICAL VESPERS. 263 to the Bishop, who repeats the same words aloud ; then having made the accustomed bows and genuflection, they all return to their places. At the beginning of the first psalm, the Bishop and the clergy sit down, and the first deacon puts the plain mitre on the Bishop. 2. At the Gloria Patri, the Bishop, with his mitre on, bows towards the altar, and the clergy do the same, taking off their caps. 3. Two of the singers, in copes, attended by the master of ceremonies, go to give the tone of the antiphons as fol- lows : the second antiphon to the first assistant deacon, the third to the assistant priest, the fourth to the clergyman who occupies the first place in the sanctuary, and the fifth to the second assistant deacon. Those to whom the tone is given, stand, *and with them, if they be assistants at the Bishop's seat, all the other assistants ; but if not, all the clergy who are in the sanctuary. 4. All the psalms and antiphons being ended, the first chanter, in cope, or the sub-deacon, attended by the mas- ter of ceremonies, goes to the place where the epistle is usually sung, and, turning towards the bishop, sings the chapter; the bishop, with his mitre on, and all the clergy, with their heads uncovered, stand whilst it is sung. The choir having answered Deo gratias, the same one who in- toned the antiphon, accompanied by the master of cere- monies, goes to the bishop, who is still standing with his mitre on, to intone the hymn ; immediately after, the mitre is taken from the bishop, who repeats the same words of the hymn, and the hymn is continued by the choir. At the hymns, Veni Creator, or Ave Maris Stella, all the clergy kneel whilst the bishop intones them ; and the bishop himself, after the intonation, kneels either at the faldstool before the middle of the altar, or on a cushion near his seat. All rise after the first strophe. 5. After the hymn, the verses having been sung by the four singers in copes, and answered by the choir, the antiphon of the Magnificat is intoned in the same manner as the hymn, to the bishop, who is still standing ; having repeated the first words, he sits down, receives the precious mitre, attended by the assistant priest, puts the incense into 264 PONTIFICAL VESPERS. the censer, and blesses it. In the meanwhile, two acolytes go to each side of the altar, and fold in the middle the veil that covers it, so as to leave the half of it near the front uncovered. 6. As the choir begins the Magnificat, the bishop rises, with his mitre on; all the assistants likewise rise; the bishop makes the sign of the cross, receives in his left hand the crosier from the assistant priest, and walks to the altar between the deacons, who raise his cope on each side ; when arrived before the lowest step, he gives the crosier to the assistant priest; the second deacon takes oif his mitre, he bows to the cross (the others making a genuflec- tion), and all go up to the altar, where the bishop, having received the censer from the assistant priest, incenses the cross and the altar ; the deacons who are at his side, raising the border of his cope, and reciting the Magnificat alter- nately with him. 7. The bishop, having incensed the altar, goes to the middle, says the Gloria Patri, bowing to the cross, goes below the lowest step, makes a reverence to the altar, receives the mitre and crosier, and returns to his seat, where he is incensed by the assistant priest; then the deacon takes off his mitre, and the bishop, holding the crosier with both his hands, remains standing till the end of Sicut erat in prindpio, after the Magnificat. 8. As soon as the bishop leaves the altar, the acolytes spread the veil over the altar. 9. After the bishop has been incensed by the assistant priest, the clergy are incensed by the first of the four singers in copes, and the singer, the master of ceremonies, the acolytes, and the people, by the censer-bearer, as it has been said elsewhere. The Magnificat is to be sung, so as to give time for the incensing. 10. Whilst the choir repeats the antiphon of the Magnifi- cat, the bishop gives up his crosier, sits down and receives the mitre. In the meantime, the master of ceremonies accompanies the acolytes, carrying the candlesticks with lighted candles, and the four chanters in copes, to the bishop's seat. After the antiphon, the bishop takes off the SOLEMN VESPERS. 265 mitre, rises, and the assistant priest, holding the book be- fore him, he sings Dominus vobiscum, and the prayer, with his hands joined, during which all the clergy stand. While the bishop says Dominus vobiscum, after the prayer, the four chanters in copes, the acolytes, and master of ceremo- nies bow to him, and go to the middle of the sanctuary ; where, having made a genuflection, the acolytes go to the side-table, and the chanters sing the Benedicamus Domino. 11. Whilst the choir answer, Deo gratias, the bishop sits down, receives the mitre, rises, sings Sit nomen Domini, etc., and gives the benediction, as usual, from his seat, if he can be seen thence by the people ; otherwise he gives it from the altar. If the celebrant be an archbishop, the cross is brought before him, he bows profoundly to it, and gives the bene- diction without mitre. Indulgences are never published at Vespers. 12. After Vespers, the bishop puts off the sacred vest- ments as usual. 13. The pontifical Vespers are sung in the manner here- tofore described, when the bishop is to celebrate a pontifical Mass the next day, or on the great solemnities of the year, such, at least, as Easter, Christmas, the Feast of the Patron Saint of the Diocese, the Titular of the Church, etc. 14. On other occasions, Vespers are celebrated with less solemnity ; then all the clergy do not put on the sacred vestments ; four of them only are dressed in copes ; the antiphons are intoned, first to the bishop, then to the other clergymen in the sanctuary, according to their dignity and order. CHAPTER II. SOLEMN VESPERS IN PRESENCE OF THE BISHOP. 1. When the bishop does not officiate at Vespers, he is vested as usual, with his rochet and cappa : he sits at his seat, having two clergymen in surplices at his side ; he 23 266 COMPLINES. puts incense into the censer and blesses it; he is incensed, immediately after the celebrant, by the assistant priest ; and after the Benedicamus Domino, and Deo gr atlas, the bishop gives the solemn blessing from his seat, if he can be seen thence by the people, otherwise from the altar. 2. The officiating priest is dressed in cope, and sits in the usual place on the Epistle side. Before he begins Deus in adjutorium, he asks the bishop's leave by bowing to him ; every time he goes from the altar to his seat, or from it to the altar, he bows to the bishop ; he does not bless the incense, or put it into the censer; he is incensed only with two swings, and not at his seat, but at the Epistle corner near the altar. 3. There may be four, or two chanters, in copes, who sit on their stools as usual, in the middle of the sanctuary ; two give the tone of the first antiphon, and that of the Magnificat, to the officiating priest; the others to the other clergymen, according to their dignity and order ; and sing the verses, Benedicamus Domino, etc. The two first amongst them accompany the celebrant to the altar for the incensing of it, raising his cope on each side; and the first of them incenses the celebrant and the clergy, including the three other singers. 4. The acolytes carry their candlesticks as usual in other Vespers. 5. The officiating priest, with the two or four chanters in cope, the acolytes, and master of ceremonies, must go to the sanctuary before the bishop, sit at their places till he enters it, as he enters, preceded by the rest of the clergy, they rise, and whilst he kneels, they kneel also. CHAPTER, III. COMPLINE, WHEN THE BISHOP OFFICIATES. 1. For Compline, the bishop is dressed in rochet and cappa; he sits in his usual place. MATINS. 267 2. When the chanter says, Jube Domne, etc., he answers, Noctcm quictam; after the Lesson, he says, Adjutorium nos- trum; then the Pater, the confession, and absolution, etc., Pens in adjutorium ; all of which are to be said standing. At the beginning of the psalms, he takes his seat. 3. All the rest is said by the choir and by the priest who should have officiated if the bishop were not present, with the exception of the prayer and of the Benedicat et custo- diat nos, etc., which are to be sung by the bishop. 4. When the bishop, although present at Compline, does not officiate, nothing is to be observed in particular, except that the officiating priest, at the words Indulgentiam, abso- lutionem, and at the Benedicat et custodial, bows profoundly to the bishop. CHAPTER IV. MATINS, WHEN THE BISHOP OFFICIATES. 1. The bishop is dressed in rochet and cappa. He is seated at his usual place ; no clergymen sit by him. He is attended by the master of ceremonies. 2. Whilst the Pater, Ave, and Credo are said, all stand ; the Credo being ended, the bishop, making with his thumb the sign of the cross on his lips, sings, Domine labia, and making the sign of the cross on himself as usual, he sings, Pens in adjictorium. He remains standing during the In- vitatorium, and the Psalm, Venite exultemus; at the words, Venite adoremus et proddamus, he kneels, then rises, and remains standing during the hymn, which he intones only in case he is to celebrate Mass, one of the chanters having intoned it. As the first psalm begins, the bishop and all the clergy take their seats. 3. The antiphons are intoned by the chanters in surplices to the clergy, beginning with those who are first in dignity and order. At the Gloria Patri, all take off their caps and bow. 268 MATINS. 4. At the versicles, which are sung by two of the chant- ers, after the third antiphon of each nocturn, all rise. The bishop says, in a loud voice, the words, Pater noster; the rest is said secretly, as far as the words et ne nos, which are sung by the bishop, who also sings the absolution, and the words of the blessing, after the Jube Domne benedicere. The bishop does not rise to give the second and third blessing at each nocturn, but remains sitting. 5. After the verses of each nocturn, the second master of ceremonies goes to invite, with a bow, the clergyman who is to sing the Lesson, beginning by those who are in- ferior in order or dignity. He accompanies him to the middle of the sanctuary before the desk prepared for the purpose ; there they make a genuflection to the altar, bow first to the bishop, then to the clergy on each side of the sanctuary ; after the absolution for the first Lesson of each nocturn, or the response for the two others, the clergyman who is to sing the Lesson bows profoundly towards the bishop, and sings, Jube Domne benedicere. After the words of the blessing, he sings the Lesson, at the end of which he kneels to the altar, on one knee, saying, Tu autem Domine, then bows profoundly to the bishop, who makes the sign of the cross towards him, and after having bowed to the clergy as before, he returns to his place. The same is done for all the other Lessons. The seventh and eighth Lessons are sung by those who are to officiate at Mass as assistant deacons, at the side of the bishop. Whilst the text of the Gospel is sung, at the seventh Lesson, the bishop and all the clergy should stand. 6. The ninth Lesson is sung by the bishop at his seat, standing, with his face turned towards the altar. Before he begins it, the two assistant deacons, and one of the aco- lytes with the hand-candlestick, and another with the book, go to him ; the two former place themselves at his side, and the latter before him. The bishop, bowing profoundly to- wards the altar, sings, Jube Domine, not Jube Domne ; all the clergy rise, and answer, Amen. Then the bishop sings the Lesson, during which the clergy remain standing. At the end of it, the bishop, bowing profoundly towards the altar, says, Tu autem Domine, etc. The choir having an- PONTIFICAL MASS. 269 swered, Deo gratias, the tone of Te Deurn is given to the bishop, who repeats the same words, and the choir continue the hymn. At the words, Te ergo qucesumus, the bishop and all the clergy kneel down. CHAPTEE V. LAUDS, WHEN THE BISHOP OFFICIATES. 1. When the bishop has officiated at Matins, it is proper that he should officiate at Lauds also. Everything is to be done as directed for Vespers, when the bishop is not to celebrate Mass the next day. Soon after the Te Deum, the bishop, at his seat, puts on all the sacred vestments, as for Vespers, and four or six clergymen put on copes. 2. The bishop begins, Deus in adjutorium, making the sign of the cross on himself. The antiphons are intoned as for Vespers, and everything else is done as directed for the same. 3. At the Benedictus, everything is done as at the Mag- nificat; and after the Benedicamus and Deo gratias, the solemn blessing is likewise given by the bishop. CHAPTER VI. SOLEMN PONTIFICAL MASS. Article I. Things to be Prepared. There should be in Cathedral churches a place or chapel to answer the purpose of that which was formerly called 270 PONTIFICAL MASS. the Secretarium. It should have an altar, the bishop's seat, seats for all the clergy, and a side-table. On the altar of this chapel, all the pontifical vestments should be prepared ; and the copes, chasubles, dalmatics, and tunics for the clergy, at their own seats. On the side- table, the bishop's sandals and stockings, the candlesticks for the acolytes, the incense-boat and censer, the book, and hand-candlestick, etc., should be placed ; to this chapel the bishop and all the clergy ought to go, immediately after having adored the Blessed Sacrament. There, the bishop, having begun Tierce, should make his preparation for Mass ; the clergy should put on the vestments suitable to their order and dignity ; the bishop should put on his sacred vestments, finish Tierce, and, after having taken off the cope, put on the dalmatic and chasuble ; and lastly, being preceded by the clergy, he should go in procession from this place to the high altar. Wherever there is not such a convenient place, every- thing is to be done in the sanctuary; we shall, therefore, in the present chapter, adapt the instructions to the ordi- nary construction of our churches. 1. The altar is to be prepared with the best and richest ornaments ; three large candlesticks with candles on each side of the cross, and a seventh one behind it. This seventh candlestick with candle is to be placed behind the cross only when the bishop of the diocese celebrates a solemn Pontifi- cal Mass. Between the candlesticks, relic-cases of a suita- ble size may be placed. 2. On the altar, the pontifical vestments, of suitable color, should be placed, one over the other, viz., imme- diately on the altar-cloth in the middle, the chasuble, then the dalmatic, tunic, cope, stole, cincture, alb, and over all the others the amice. On the Epistle side, near the vest- ments, the pectoral cross and the ring should be on a plate ; on the Gospel side, the gloves on another plate. On the Gospel side the precious mitre, and the golden mitre on the Epistle side, standing against the candlesticks, and the crosier at the same corner, against the angle formed by the altar and the pilaster near it. 3. The Bishop's seat is to be on the Gospel side, against PONTIFICAL MASS. 271 the side-walls of the sanctuary ; it should be on a platform, raised by three steps above the floor of the sanctuary ; the platform should be large enough to admit two wooden stools without backs, decently painted, for the two assistant deacons, on each side of the Bishop's chair, which should have a high back and convenient arms, and be covered with silk cloth ; there should be a third stool, of the same form with the others, near that of the second assistant deacon, but projecting more towards the front of the plat- form - , for the assistant priest. Over the Bishop's chair there should be a canopy, with hangings all around ; the walls behind the chair, and the assistants' stools, should likewise be covered with hangings, which ought to be of a color suitable to the festival. 4. The side-table ought to be placed on the Epistle side of the altar, and covered all around and on the top with white linen cloth. It should be sufficiently large. On this table there should be two candlesticks with candles for the acolytes, the chalice with its purifier, paten, host, pall, and burse, containing the corporal ; the Missal, for the Epistle and Gospel ; behind the chalice, standing against the wall, the cruets on a plate, the basin and ewer for washing the Bishop's hands, two or three fine towels on a plate, the book containing the canon, the Missal for the Bishop, with his maniple in it, the hand-candlestick, the Bishop's sandals and stockings on a plate, covered with a veil. Over the chalice, the long veil, the two extremi- ties of which ought to hang down on each side of the table. 5. The bench of the ministers should be on the Epistle side, below the table, and against the side-walls of the sanctuary. It should be covered with baize. On it the maniples of the deacon and sub-deacon should be placed. 6. A sufficient number of seats for the clergy should be placed on each side of the sanctuary; they ought not to be the usual chairs, but benches with a back, covered with drapery. 7. There should be a number of acolytes in surplices, no fewer than eight. The first of them carries the book, and holds it when the Bishop reads out of it ; but when he sings, the book must be held by the assistant priest. The 272 PONTIFICAL MASS. second holds the hand-candlestick whenever the Bishop reads or sings anything, either at his seat or at the altar. The third acolyte, who, besides the surplice, wears a cope, is to carry the crosier. The fourth, if he is not dressed in cope, wears on his surplice a long veil, hanging from his neck before him, in order to cover his hands with it when he holds the mitre. The fifth is the censer- bearer. The sixth and the seventh are to carry the candlesticks. The eighth carries the apron, which is a rich cloth that is spread on the lap of the Bishop, when seated. 8. The faldstool is a kind of folding seat, sufficiently large, the four corners of which project about a foot above the cushion, when laid on it ; these corners are connected together only on the two sides, six inches above the cushion, with two cross-pieces, which, as well as the projecting cor- ners, should be of gilt metal. Thus it remains open be- hind and before. It is covered with a silk cloth of the color of the vestments, which hangs down to the ground on the four sides. It is used as a praying desk for the Bishop, and as a chair, when, for ordinations or other cere- monies, he is to sit at the altar. Two cushions covered with the same cloth are to be prepared ; one on the seat and another before it, to kneel or stand on. It is to be placed in the middle of the sanctuary, whenever the Bishop is to kneel. 9. We suppose in the following instructions that the Cathedral church has no Secretarium or chapel, as men- tioned in the beginning of this chapter; but in case it should have one, the Bishop and clergy vest and sing Tierce in it. 10. In the sacristy, the following things are to be pre- pared : a cope for the assistant priest, who puts it on over his surplice, without stole ; two amices, albs, cinctures, and dalmatics for the two assistant deacons. They wear neither stoles nor maniples. Also two amices, albs, and cinctures for the deacon and sub-deacon ; also a stole for the deacon. Their maniples are to be placed on their seats in the sanc- tuary. The clergy are to be in sacred vestments. Some of them, the first in dignity, wear copes over their sur- plices; some, chasubles over their albs; no maniples or VESTING OF THE CLERGY AND BISHOP. 273 stoles are to be used by them. The clergymen who are not priests are to be dressed in dalmatics over their albs, but without stoles and maniples. A sufficient number of these vestments ought to be prepared in the sacristy. In order to have a sufficient number of clergymen in towns and cities, where there are several congregations besides that of the Cathedral, the service ought to be performed in those earlier than usual, so that all the clergy may go to the Cathedral. This custom is observed in other countries, and it is conformable to what was practiced in remote an- tiquity. The Bishops can and ought to introduce it into this country. Article II. Of the Vesting of the Clergy and of the Bishop. 1. The clergy put on their vestments in the sacristy, before the Bishop arrives. Those who are to officiate as assistant priest and assistant deacons, preceded by the in- ferior clergy, who wear no sacred vestments, all in surplices, accompany the Bishop from his house to the sacristy, if there be no street between it and the church ; otherwise, from the room where he has put on the rochet and cappa magna, and, two by two, walk before him ; lastly, the deacon and sub-deacon ; the assistant priest walks alone immediately before the Bishop, and the two assistant dea- cons at each side of him. 2. The Bishop having arrived at the sacristy, and bowed to the cross, the clergy go to the sanctuary, first those in surplices, then those in dalmatics, chasubles, and copes. The assistant priest goes immediately before the Bishop, and the two assistant deacons on each side of him. As the clergy arrive at the middle of the sanctuary, they make a genuflection, bow to one another, and go to their places on each side of the sanctuary ; the inferior clergy towards the railing, and those in superior grades towards the altar. The deacon and sub-deacon go to their bench. The Bishop bows to the cross, and kneels for awhile at the faldstool. All the clergy kneel and rise with him. After a short 274 PONTIFICAL MASS. prayer he goes to his seat, having at his side the assistant deacons in surplices. 3. The Bishop, standing with his head uncovered, turn- ing towards the altar, says secretly, Pater and Ave. Then making the sign of the cross on himself, he sings, Deus in adjutorium, etc.; then he intones the hymn, Nunc Sancte, etc.; one of the singers intones the antiphon, then the Psalm, Legem pone ; which having been begun, the Bishop and the clergy sit down and put on their caps ; the assist- ant priest and deacons alone remaining standing by the Bishop. 4. The acolytes bring the book and the hand-candle- stick to the Bishop ; the book-bearer kneels down. The Bishop reads the anthem Ne reminiscaris, and the Psalms for the preparation of Mass. The sub-deacon, accompanied by the second master of ceremonies, brings from the table the plate with the sandals and stockings covered with the veil ; six acolytes follow him and surround the Bishop's seat ; the sub-deacon, assisted by the second master of ceremonies, takes off the Bishop's shoes and puts on him the stockings and sandals ; afterwards the sub-deacon and acolytes retire to their places. 5. The Psalms having been read, and the anthem, Ne reminiscaris, repeated by the Bishop, he rises, with his head uncovered, and turning towards the altar, says, Kyrie eleison, with the verse and prayers that follow. Then he takes off the cappa, saying the appropriate prayer. The aco- lytes bring the basin, ewer, and towels, and the Bishop washes his hands, saying the prayer, Da, Domine. The assistant priest takes off the Bishop's ring before he washes his hands, and puts it on after he has washed them, and presents him the towel to wipe them. 6. When the Bishop rises, after having read the Psalms, the second master of ceremonies goes up to the altar, fol- lowed by the acolytes, who, one after another, make first a genuflection before the lower step, go up, receive severally one of the vestments, make another genuflection on the platform, go down and place themselves in a line, begin- ning at the Gospel side. When all have received the vest- ments, that is, the amice, alb, cincture, pectoral cross, stole, VESTING OF THE CLERGY AND BISHOP. 275 cope, and mitre, at a signal given by the master of cere- monies, they make a genuflection, and walk one after another in a line to the Bishop's seat. When the first who carries the amice is arrived before the last step of the Bishop's seat, he and all the others stop one behind another. The second master of ceremonies stops at the left hand of the first acolyte, who, having given the amice, gives his place to the next, goes to his right hand ; they both bow to the Bishop, and the first acolyte returns to his place ; the others do in like manner. 7. Whilst the Bishop is washing his hands, the deacon and sub-deacon go to the throne, and as soon as he has washed his hands, the assistant deacon and priest go down, where, having with the deacon and sub-deacon bowed to the Bishop, the assistant priest and deacons go to put on their vestments in the sacristy ; the deacon goes to the Bishop's right, and the sub-deacon to the left. The dea- con receives from the acolytes all the vestments, with the assistance of the sub-deacon, that is, the amice, alb, cinc- ture, pectoral cross, stole, cope, and mitre. After which the Bishop takes his seat. The deacon and sub-deacon go down, and having made a bow to the Bishop, together with the assistant priest and deacons, retire to their bench ; the assistant priest and deacons go up to their usual places, and seat themselves. 8. When all the Psalms, with the anthem, have been sung, which ought to be done slowly, to give sufficient time for the vesting of the Bishop, the second master of ceremonies accompanies the sub-deacon to the place where the Epistle is sung, and the latter turning towards the Bishop, sings the chapter. The bishop, before the sub- deacon begins it, rises with his mitre on ; the clergy like- wise rise with their heads uncovered. The sub-deacon having sung the chapter, returns to his place. The chant- ers chant the responses and verses ; which being ended, the acolytes with the candlestick, and those with the book and hand-candlestick, go to the Bishop's seat ; the second assistant deacon takes off the mitre, and the Bishop sings the Dominus vobisciim, and the prayer from the book, which the assistant priest holds before him. 276 PONTIFICAL MASS. 9. The singers having sung Benedicamus Domino, and the choir answered Deo gratias, the deacon and sub-deacon return to the Bishop's side, exchanging places with the two assistant deacons ; they take off the cope from the Bishop, and give it to an acolyte, who carries it to the sacristy. In the meanwhile, the second master of ceremonies gives to the acolytes, in the same manner as in n. 6, the tunic, dalmatic, the plate with the gloves, the chasuble, and the crosier, and the plate with the ring. The acolytes with the book and the candle, go to the Bishop's seat, and the acolytes with the vestments also go at a signal given by the master of ceremonies. 10. The deacon and sub-deacon vest the Bishop, who reads the prayers appointed for each vestment. If he be an Archbishop, after he has put on the chasuble, a sub-deacon brings from the altar the pallium, gives it to the deacon, who, assisted by the sub-deacon, puts it on him. Then the Bishop sits, and the deacon puts on him the mitre, and the assistant priest the ring on his finger. 11. The Bishop having thus put on all the sacred vest- ments, the deacon and sub-deacon retire to their bench, and give their places to the two assistant deacons. If Tierce has been sung in the chapel, or Secretarium, the censer-bearer comes to the Bishop with the censer and boat, gives it to the assistant priest, and the Bishop puts the incense into the censer and blesses it. Then they go to the high altar in procession, in the following order : the censer-bearer first, the cross-bearer in sub-deacon's dress, between the acolytes carrying the candlesticks, the clergy in surplices, those in dalmatics, the priests in chasu- ble, those in cope, all two by two. Then the sub-deacon, who is to officiate at Mass, carrying before his breast the Missal closed, with the Bishop's maniple in it ; after him the deacon, at the left of the assistant priest, in cope ; last, the Bishop, between the two assistant deacons, with the crosier in his left, and blessing the people with his right hand. After the Bishop follow the acolytes, who carry the cross, mitre, book, hand-candlestick, etc., two by two. As the clergy arrive in the sanctuary, they make a genu- BEGINNING. 277 flection in the middle, bow to one another, and go to their places. The Bishop goes to the altar and begins Mass, as will be said hereafter. If the pontiff be an Archbishop, the archiepiscopal cross is carried by the cross-bearer, in sub-deacon's dress, imme- diately before the clergy in sacred vestments. Article III. The Pontifical Mass. 1. The Bishop rises, takes the crosier in his left hand, and with his right blesses the clergy (who arise and bow to him) and the people as he goes to the altar between the two assistant deacons. The deacon and sub-deacon put on their maniples. The second master of ceremonies gives the Missal with the Bishop's maniple in it to the sub-deacon, and all go to the altar. 2. The Bishop having arrived before the lower step, in the middle, the two assistant deacons give place to the as- sistant priest, who goes to the Bishop's right, and to the deacon, who goes to the left, and place themselves at a little distance behind them ; the sub-deacon goes to the left of the deacon, and remains a little behind him, giving the book to the master of ceremonies. The acolytes who carry the crosier and the mitre place themselves a little behind the two assistant deacons. The Bishop, after his mitre has been taken off by the deacon, makes a profound bow to the cross, and all the others make a genuflection. Then the Bishop begins Mass, In nomine Pair is y etc. ; at the words Et vos fratres, he turns himself towards the ministers, and they, at the words Tibi, pater, etc., bow to the Bishop. 3. After the prayer, Indulgentiam, absolutionem, etc., the sub-deacon, taking the maniple out of the Missal, gives it to the Bishop to kiss, and puts it on his arm. 4. Whilst the Bishop makes the confession, all the clergy in sacred vestments standing, make it alternately, two by two. The inferior clergy kneel down during the confes- sion. After it, the Bishop goes up to the altar as usual, but the assistant priest passes to his left, and the deacon to 278 PONTIFICAL MASS. his right hand. The sub-deacon at the Gospel side goes up with the Missal, which he with the assistant priest present open to the Bishop, who, after having kissed the altar, touching it with both his hands, kisses it at the beginning of the Gospel to be read on that day. 5. The incense is then put into the censer and blessed, the deacon offering the boat, and presenting the censer to the Bishop, who incenses the altar, as usual ; and after it, standing with his mitre on, by the corner of the altar, at the Epistle side, he is incensed by the deacon ; then, having received the crosier, and made from the same place a reverence to the cross, he goes, between the two assistant deacons, to bis seat. The deacon and sub-deacon go to their bench on the Epistle side. The Bishop, standing, without mitre, making the sign of the cross on himself, reads the Introit, from the book which the acolyte holds open before him ; another acolyte holding near him the hand-candle- stick, and the assistant deacons and priests turning the leaves of the book when necessary. Then he says, alter- nately with them, Kyrie eleison. The same is said likewise by the deacon and sub-deacon, and by all the clergy, two by two, alternately. Afterwards the Bishop sits down, and the first deacon puts on him the lighter mitre and the apron. All the clergy also sit at their places. 6. After the Kyrie is sung by the choir, all rise, and the Bishop, without mitre, turned towards the altar, sings, Gloria in excelsis Deo, the assistant priest holding the book before him, whilst he sings those words; but whilst he reads the rest, the book is held by the acolyte. The same is to be observed on all other occasions, viz. : when the Bishop sings, the assistant priest holds the book; but when he reads, the acolyte holds it, and the assistant deacons point out what is to be read, and turn the leaves of the book. The assistants say with the Bishop, in a low voice, the rest of the Angelical Hymn, likewise the deacon and sub-deacon, and all the clergy. The hymn having been recited, the Bishop and the clergy sit down, and the deacon puts the plain mitre on the Bishop, and the apron on his lap. The choir having sung the Gloria, the deacon takes off the Bishop's mitre GOSPEL. 279 and the apron ; all rise ; and the Bishop, turned towards the people, sings, Pax vobls, and the prayer; after which all sit down, and the deacon puts on the Bishop the mitre, and the apron on his lap. 7. The sub-deacon, having received the Missal from the second master of ceremonies and holding it on his breast, goes, attended by the same, to the middle, makes a genu- flection to the altar, bows to the Bishop and to the clergy, goes to the Epistle side, and, turned towards the Bishop, sings the Epistle ; after it, he makes the usual genuflection and bow, goes to the Bishop, kneels before him, lays the book on his knees, and kisses the Bishop's hand, placed on the book, and having received his blessing, returns to his place, where he gives the book to the master of ceremonies. 8. After the sub-deacon has kissed the Bishop's hand, the acolytes, with the book and the hand-candlestick, go before him ; and the Bishop sitting, with his mitre on, reads the Epistle, Tract, and says the Munda cor meum, etc., and reads the Gospel, with his hands joined, the assistant deacons remaining standing, and answering, Et cum spiritu tuo, and Laus tibi Christe. 9. Towards the end of this, the deacon having received the Missal from the second master of ceremonies, carries it raised before him to the altar, bowing to the Bishop and to the clergy, and making a genuflection before the lower step, places it in the middle of the altar, goes down, makes a genuflection, goes to the Bishop, kisses his hand, returns to the altar, kneels on the lower step, says, in a low voice, Munda cor mcum, rises, goes up to take the Missal, comes down, and places himself below the lower step a little to- wards the Epistle side, with the sub-deacon, who, at the same time, goes to his left, they being exactly in the middle, where they wait. In the meantime, the censer-bearer hav- ing gone to the Bishop's seat, with the censer and boat, the incense is put in and blessed, as usual. The censer-bearer, accompanied by the second master of ceremonies, goes be- hind the deacon ; the master of ceremonies behind the sub- deacon ; and the two acolytes, with their candlesticks and lighted candles, behind them. At a signal given by the master of ceremonies, they all make a genuflection, bow to the Bishop and to the clergy, and go to the Bishop's seat, 280 PONTIFICAL MASS. walking in the order in which they are, the deacon and snb-deacon first. Having arrived before the Bishop's seat, they all kneel and remain so ; the deacon saying, Jube Domne, benedicere, receives the blessing, Dominus sit, etc., and kisses the Bishop's hand. Then they all rise, and go to the place where the Gospel is to be sung. 10. The master of ceremonies walks first, after him the censer-bearer, then the two acolytes with the candlesticks, the sub-deacon, and last the deacon. The sub-deacon places himself with his face towards the Epistle side, be- tween the two acolytes, and holds the book resting on his head. The deacon turns towards the book, and the master of ceremonies and censer-bearer are at his side. The dea- con sings, Dominus vobiscum, Sequentia, etc., making the sign of the cross ori the book and himself, etc., incenses the book thrice, towards the middle, the right and the left of the same. The Bishop, at the beginning of the Gospel, rises, without mitre, receives the crosier, which he keeps between both his hands, makes the sign of the cross on himself, bows at the names of Jesus and Mary, kisses the book, which, after the Gospel, is brought to him by the sub-deacon, and says, Per evangelica dicta, etc. ; and lastly is incensed by the assistant priest. The deacon and all the others return to their places, making the usual genuflections and bows. 11. If the Bishop preach, he should do it from his throne. But should this be so placed as to prevent the people from seeing or hearing him, the faldstool should be placed on the platform of the altar in the middle, and five other seats, viz., three at the right, and two at the left of the faldstool. The assistant priest sits at his right; near the as- sistant priest, the deacon of the Gospel ; and near him, the first assistant deacon. At the left of the Bishop, the sub- deacon, and near him the second assistant deacon. If the Bishop should not preach, a priest may do it from the pulpit ; but first he should go to kiss the Bishop's hand, ask the blessing, saying, Jube Domne. benedicere, and ask the Indul- gences. After the sermon, the deacon of the Gospel sings the Confiteor, near the Bishop, if the Bishop has preached at the altar, otherwise before the lowest step of the Bishop's seat; the assistant priest publishes the Indulgences, and the OFFERTORY. 281 Bishop, standing without mitre, says, Precihus et merit-is, then puts on his mitre, and gives the benediction. In case the sermon has been delivered by a priest, the preacher publishes the Indulgences in place of the assistant priest. 12. After the benediction, the Bishop returns to his seat; or if there has been no sermon, after having been incensed, he intones, Credo in unum Deum, the assistant priest hold- ing the book till these words are sung ; then he gives it to the acolyte, who remains there with the other, holding the hand-candlestick, till the* Bishop and the assistants have finished the Credo, which is also recited by the deacon and sub-deacon, and all the clergy, two by two, at their respec- tive places. At the words, Et incarnatus, they all kneel. The Creed being said, they all sit down, and the first as- sistant deacon puts the plain mitre on the Bishop, and spreads the apron upon his knees. When the choir sings the words, Et incarnatus, the Bishop, with his mitre on, and all the clergy in sacred vestments, uncovering their heads, bow profoundly towards the altar; the rest of the clergy kneel. However, on Christmas day, and on the festival of the Annunciation, the Bishop and all the clergy kneel. 13. After the Incarnatus has been sung, the deacon and the sub-deacon rise; the deacon, attended by the second master of ceremonies, goes to the side-table, receives the burse from the master of ceremonies, and, having made the usual bows and genuflections, carries it to the altar, extends the corporal in the middle of it, places the burse on the Epistle side, makes a genuflection, and returns to his place. Then he and the sub-deacon sit down. 14. Towards the end of the Creed all the ministers rise; the Bishop rises when it is ended, the mitre and the apron having been previously taken from him. Then standing, he sings Dominus vobiscum and Oremus, and reads the Offer- tory out of the book, which is held before him by one of the acolytes, attended by the other, who holds the hand- candlestick. Afterwards he sits down, the deacon puts on him the precious mitre, the assistant priest takes off his ring, and the deacons his gloves. The two acolytes bring him the basin and ewer to wash his hands, and the towel 24 282 PONTIFICAL MASS. to wipe them ; the assistant priest presents one of them, after he has washed his hands, and having wiped them, puts the ring on his finger. Then the assistant priest hav- ing received from the master of ceremonies the Missal with its cushion or stand, attended by the same, carries it to the altar, and puts it, opened at the proper place, near the cor- poral, on the Gospel side, and waits for the Bishop, retir- ing to the further corner of the same side of the altar. 15. The Bishop having put on the ring, rises, takes the crosier in his left hand, and between the two assistant dea- cons, followed by the acolytes of the mitre and of the cro- sier, goes to the altar, blessing on his way the people and the clergy ; when he has arrived before the lower step, he lays aside the crosier and puts otf the mitre, makes a pro- found bow to the cross, goes up to the altar, assisted by the deacon of the Gospel at his right, and the assistant priest at his left, kisses the altar in the middle, placing his hands on each side. The clergy sit down. The assistant deacons stand on the second step on each side. The crosier and mitre-bearers stand at a certain distance from the lowest step, behind the two assistant deacons. 16. The sub-deacon, after the Bishop has washed his hands, goes to the side-table, attended by the second master of ceremonies and acolytes, who put on his shoulders the long veil, with which the chalice and other things on the table were covered, leaving it to hang lower on his right side. The sub-deacon takes, with his left hand, the chalice with the paten, particle, and pall, extends the longest part of the veil over it, places his right hand on the veil and chalice, lest anything should fall, and thus goes to the altar, followed by the acolyte who carries the cruets with wine and water; when arrived there, at the same time with the Bishop, he places the chalice on the altar at the Epistle side, and removes the veil from it. 1 7. The deacon receives from, the sub-deacon the paten with the particle, kisses it, and gives it to the Bishop, kissing his hand; the Bishop, as usual, raises it before his breast, says, Suscipe Sancte Pater, etc., places the particle on the cprporal, and the paten under it at his right. In the mean- while, the deacon wipes the chalice with the purifier, OFFERTORY. 283 receives the cruet with the wine from the sub-deacon, who had received it from the acolyte, puts some wine into the chalice, and the sub-deacon, raising the cruet with water a little towards the Bishop, says, Benedicite, Pater Rever- end issime, and the Bishop having made towards it the sign of the cross, whilst the sub-deacon puts some drops of water into the chalice, says the prayer, Deus qui humance. Then the deacon gives the chalice to the Bishop, kissing it first, then the Bishop's hand ; the Bishop receives it at the knob, with his right hand, and at the foot with his left, and offers it together with the deacon, who, with his left hand, sup- ports the Bishop's elbow, and with his right the foot of the chalice, saying with the Bishop the prayer, Offerimus tibi, etc. ; afterwards, the sub-deacon having extended the lower part of the veil hanging on his right on the altar, and put his right hand on it, the deacon gives him the paten, which he covers with a veil, goes down below the steps, and hold- ing the paten raised, remains behind the Bishop till the Pater is said. 18. Mass is continued as usual, and after the Bishop has said the words Benedic hoc sacrijicium tuo sa,ncto nomini prwparatum, the censer-bearer goes to the altar ; incense is put into the censer, the deacon holding the censer, and say- ing Benedicite, Pater Peverendissime, the Bishop blesses it, saying, Per inter •cessionem, etc. ; then, having received the censer from the deacon, the Bishop incenses the Oblata, saying, Incensum istud — the cross, saying, Dirigatur, Domine — the relics, saying nothing; and continues the other prayers, as he incenses the altar ; which being done, he gives back the censer to the deacon, saying, Accendat; then having received the precious mitre from the first assist- ant deacon, standing at the Epistle corner, he is incensed by the deacon of the Mass, who incenses the assistant priest, the two assistant deacons, the clergy in the sanctuary, ac- cording to their rank and order, lastly the sub-deacon; afterwards he gives back the censer to the censer-bearer, who incenses the deacon, then the master of ceremonies, the acolytes, and the people. 19. After the Bishop is incensed, the first assistant dea- con takes off his mitre; he continues Mass as usual, the 284 PONTIFICAL MASS. assistant priest and the acolyte with the hand-candlestick remaining by the Missal. The deacon standing on the second step behind the Bishop, being incensed, remains there till the Sanctus, then he goes up to the right of the Bishop, and says it with him and the assistant priest. Likewise, all the clergy in the sanctuary, two by two, say the Sanctus at the same time. After the Sanctus, the dea- con goes down to the second step behind the Bishop. 20. At the Sanctus, four or six acolytes, accompanied by the second master of ceremonies, go from the sacristy to the sanctuary, holding in their hand large candles lighted ; when they reach the middle of the sanctuary, they make a genuflection, bow to the clergy at each side of the sanc- tuary, kneel in a line at a convenient distance from one another ; those who, are at the Epistle side hold their candle in their right, and those at the Gospel side in their left hand, keeping their arm extended, and the end of the candle resting on the floor. They remain there till after the elevation, unless the Bishop give the communion; in which case they remain kneeling during the communion of the clergy, which is given at the altar, and accompany the Bishop to the railing, where he gives the communion to the people. After the communion, they go back to the sacristy. 21. After the Sanctus has been recited by the Bishop and the clergy, all in the sanctuary and in the church kneel down, except the ministers assisting at the altar. When the Bishop says Quam oblationem, the deacon goes up to his right during the consecration and elevation, kneels down, raises with his left hand the Bishop's chasuble on his side ; after the elevation of the consecrated Host, he rises, uncovers the chalice, kneels again, raises the Bishop's chasuble as before, and after the elevation of the chalice, rises, covers the chalice, and makes a genuflection with the Bishop. The two assistant deacons, the sub- deacon, and the assistant priest remain kneeling at their places during the elevation. The assistant priest, with his right hand, raises the chasuble of the Bishop on his side during the elevation. The master of ceremonies rings the AGNUS DEI. 285 bell at the elevation, and the censer-bearer incenses thrice the Blessed Sacrament at each elevation. 22. During the elevation, nothing should be sung ; but some devout and harmonious tunes may be played on the organ. After the elevation, the choir sings Benedictus, qui venit, and all rise, and stand until the communion. The celebrant continues Mass as usual ; the deacon makes a genuflection and goes to his place behind the Bishop. At the words Benedicts et prcestas nobis, the deacon goes to the right of the Bishop, makes with him a genuflection, and uncovers the chalice; at the words Per ipsum, he places two fingers on the foot of the chalice, and after the words, Omnis honor et gloria, he covers the chalice, makes a genu- flection with the Bishop, and goes to his place behind him. 23. At the Pater Noster, when the Bishop says Et dimitte nobis, the deacon and sub-deacon, having made a genuflec- tion, go up to the altar, the deacon to the right of the Bishop, and the sub-deacon to the right of the deacon ; there, the sub-deacon, placing his hand on the altar, the deacon uncovers the paten, receives it from the sub-deacon, cleans it with the purifier, kisses it, and puts it into the Bishop's hand, which he also kisses, whilst the Bishop says, Libera nos qucesumus, etc. As the Bishop places the paten under the Host, the deacon uncovers the chalice, makes a genuflection, and rises with the Bishop, who puts the par- ticle of the Host in the chalice ; the deacon then covers it, and again makes a genuflection. The sub-deacon, having given the paten to the deacon, takes offhis veil, gives it to the second master of ceremonies, and having made a genuflec- tion, returns to his place at the foot of the altar ; he does not go up to say the Agnus Dei, but he goes to the right of the Bishop, whilst the deacon remains at his left, in place of the assistant priest. 24. The assistant priest and the officiating deacon say the Agnus Dei, with the Bishop ; the rest of the clergy say it at the same time, at their places. After the Agnus Dei, the assistant priest and the deacon make a genuflection, exchange places, and again make a genuflection ; the dea- con remains near the Missal, and the assistant priest kneels down whilst the celebrant says the prayer, Domine Jesu 286 PONTIFICAL MASS. Christe qui dixisti; after which, he rises, kisses the altar at the same time with the Bishop, receives from him the Pax, approaching his left cheek to the left cheek of the cele- brant, placing his two hands under the celebrant's elbows and answering, Etcumspiritutuo. Then rising, he carries the Pax to the clergy, giving it to the first of them on each side of the sanctuary ; on returning teethe foot of the altar, he gives it to the master of ceremonies, by whom he was accompanied, and goes up to the left of the Bishop. The first assistant deacon, after the assistant priest has received the Pax, goes to the Bishop's right, and receives it in the same manner ; then the second assistant deacon, the officiat- ing deacon, and lastly the sub-deacon. When the Bishop is to give communion, after he has received the Precious Blood, the deacon and sub-deacon at his left, kneel on the platform before the Bishop, who, without saying Misereatur, etc., or Ecce Agnus Dei, etc., gives them Holy Communion. They then receive the Pax, kissing the Bishop's left cheek. The officiating deacon then sings the Conjiteor for the communion of the clergy. 25. The deacon, after the communion, goes to the right of the Bishop, receives the cruets from the acolyte, serves the wine for the first ablution, and the wine and water for the second, after which he places the purifier on the Bishop's fingers. After the Bishop has taken the first ablution, the assistant priest carries the Missal, on its cushion or stand, from the Gospel to the Epistle side, followed by the aco- lyte with the candlestick. The deacon puts the mitre on the head of the Bishop, who washes his hands, two acolytes having brought the basin and ewer, with water and the towel. The assistant priest takes off his ring, presents him the towel to wipe his hands, and replaces the ring on his finger. Then the officiating deacon takes off the Bishop's mitre. Tn the meantime, the sub-deacon, having folded the corporal, and put it in the burse, and placed the puri- fier, paten, pall, and burse on the chalice, carries it to the side-table, and places himself below the lower step behind the deacon, who stands on the middle step, behind the Bishop, who, attended by the assistant priest, and remain- ing near the Missal, ou the Epistle side, reads the commu- AGNUS DEI. 287 nion, goes to the middle, followed by the deacon and sub- deacon, says, Dominus vobiscum, and finishes Mass as usual. After the last prayer and Dominus vobiscum, the Bishop remains turned towards the people, towards whom the deacon also turns, and sings, Ite, Missa est. Then both turn to the altar towards the Epistle side. The Bishop having said, Placeattibi, etc., gives the solemn blessing, as usual. If the celebrant is an archbishop, he gives the blessing without mitre, bowing first to the cross which is held be- fore him. Then he lays his pallium on the altar, and says, Initium Sancti Evangeiii. When the Indulgence has not been already published, in consequence of no sermon having been preached, the assistant priest publishes it as usual, from the Epistle side. 26. The Bishop then takes off his mitre, begins the Gospel of St. John, at the Gospel side, puts on the mitre, takes the crosier in his left hand, and continues the Gospel while going to his seat, where he finishes it. 27. The Gospel being ended, the two assistant deacons give their places to the deacon and sub-deacon, and retire to the ministers' bench. The Bishop, having disrobed, washes his hands, and puts on the cappa and pectoral cross ; then two acolytes bring the book and candle, and the master of ceremonies brings the Bishop's shoes to his seat, who reads the thanksgiving, whilst the acolytes take off his sandals and put on his shoes. Which being done, and the thanksgiving ended, the clergy and Bishop return to the sacristy, and thence the Bishop is accompanied to his house, or to his room, where he may put on his rochet and cape. 288 SOLEMN MASS IN PRESENCE CHAPTER VII. SOLEMN MASS CELEBRATED IN PRESENCE OF THE BISHOP DRESSED IN COPE. 1. On solemn festivals, when the Bishop does not cele- brate a Pontifical Mass, it is proper that he should assist at the divine service in mitre and cope. On such occasions, what follows is to be observed : 2. The Bishop's vestments should be placed on the altar, viz., amice, alb, cincture, pectoral cross on a plate, stole and cope; two mitres, one on each side, and the crosier. On the side-table, besides everything necessary for High Mass, a Missal for the Bishop, the hand-candlestick with a candle, the basin and ewer, and a towel on a plate. 3. The celebrant and ministers go to the church before the Bishop, and seat themselves at the bench, waiting for him. 4. The Bishop, accompanied by the clergy, goes to the church, and having arrived at the middle of the sanctuary, kneels before the faldstool, rises, after having said a short prayer, and with him all the clergy rise. Then, between the two assistant deacons, preceded by the assistant priest, who are all dressed in surplices, he goes to his seat, where he puts on all the vestments before mentioned. Thus vested, with his mitre on, and the crosier in his left hand, he goes to the altar, whither the celebrant and ministers have gone before him. 5. On arriving before the altar, the Bishop takes off his mitre, bows to the cross, the others making a genuflection, and, having the celebrant on his right, the deacon on the right of the celebrant, the assistant priest on his left, and the sub-deacon at the left of the assistant priest, and the two assistant deacons behind the celebrant and the assist- ant priest, and the acolytes, with the mitre and crosier, OF THE BISHOP IN COPE. 289 behind the assistant deacon, he makes the Confession, say- ing, as usual, In nomine Patris, etc., the celebrant and the ministers answering. After the prayer, Indulgentiam, abso- lutionem, the Bishop makes a profound bow, receives the mitre and the crosier from the first assistant deacon, and returns to his seat; the celebrant having bowed to the Bishop, goes to the middle and continues Mass. 6. The Bishop, on arriving at his seat, gives the crosier into the hands of the assistant priest, sits with his mitre on ; then the censer-bearer, presenting the censer, and giving the boat to the assistant priest, the Bishop puts incense into the censer, and blesses it, as usual. The celebrant incenses the cross and altar, as usual; then he is incensed with two swings only, by the deacon, who gives the censer to the censer-bearer, by whom it is carried to the Bishop's seat, and given to the assistant priest, who is below the lowest step, where he incenses the Bishop with three swings. After- wards, the Bishop's mitre is taken off by the second assist- ant deacon, and the Missal and candlestick are brought by the acolytes before the Bishop, who commences the Introit, when the celebrant begins to read it at the altar. After the Introit, the Bishop says the Kyrie alternately with the assistants and the priests who are present at Mass in the sanctuary dressed in surplices. They go before the Bishop's seat, placing themselves in a semicircle ; after having bowed to him, they say the Kyrie and Gloria with the Bishop ; at the end of the Kyrie, they bow and return to their places. The Bishop, as they bow, gives them his blessing. If the choir has not finished singing the Kyrie, the Bishop sits, receives the mitre, and the assistants also sit and cover their heads ; otherwise, he remains standing. At the Gloria, he rises without his mitre ; the book is not held before him during the Gloria, but he says it by heart with his assist- ants, standing. He sits, with his mitre on, after the Gloria. During the Dominus vobiscum and the Collects, the Bishop stands with his head uncovered. After the Collects, he sits with his mitre on. The sub-deacon, turned towards the Bishop, sings the Epistle, and, having sung it, goes to kiss the Bishop's hand, and to receive his blessing. Then the acolytes come to him with the Missal and candlestick, 25 290 SOLEMN MASS IN PRESENCE OF THE BISHOP. and the Bishop reads the Epistle and Tract, says, Munda cor meum, and reads the Gospel. 7. A little before the Bishop finishes reading the Gospel, the deacon, having placed the Missal on the middle of the altar, goes to kiss the Bishop's hand ; he then returns to the altar, and says, kneeling, Munda cor meum. In the meantime, the censer-bearer carries the censer to the Bishop's seat, and the incense is put in, and blessed by the Bishop, as usual. Afterwards, the deacon and sub-deacon, with the master of ceremonies, censer-bearer, and acolytes, go to the Bishop's seat, as has been said elsewhere, and kneel down ; the deacon asks and receives the blessing, and sings the Gospel, as usual. After it, the sub-deacon carries the book to the Bishop to be kissed ; and the assistant priest incenses the Bishop. The celebrant is not incensed. If there is a sermon, the preacher asks the Bishop's blessing. 8. At the Credo, the Bishop rises, the priests go before his seat, as at the Kyrie and Gloria, say it with him, and kneel also with him, at the words Inearnatus est. The book is not carried to the Bishop, who says the Credo by heart. At the Offertory, the Bishop, standing, with his head uncovered, reads it out of the Missal, which the acolyte holds open before him ; and then sits, with the mitre on. The sub-deacon carries the cruet with water to the Bishop, and says, Benedicite, Reverendissime Pater; the Bishop then blesses the water. Afterwards he puts incense into the censer and blesses it. The celebrant incenses the obla- tion, the cross, and the altar, as usual, then he is incensed twice only by the deacon, who carries the censer to the Bishop's seat; and the assistant priest, coming down to the foot of the throne, receives the censer, incenses the Bishop thrice, returns the censer to the deacon, who incenses the assistant priest, the first and second assistant deacons, and afterwards the clergy in the sanctuary, and the sub-deacon. 9. At the Preface, the Bishop stands with his head un- covered ; he recites the Sanctus by heart, with the assistants and the priests, who go before his seat as at the Kyrie and Gloria. After the Sanctus, the Bishop goes to the middle of the sanctuary, between the two assistant deacons, and SOLEMN MASS. 291 followed by the acolytes carrying the crosier and mitre, and there kneels at the faldstool, till after the elevation ; he then returns to his seat, and stands till after the communion of the priest. 10. At the Agnus Dei, the priests go to the Bishop's seat, and say it with him ; then they return to their places. The assistant priest goes to the right of the celebrant, and, with the usual ceremonies, receives from him the Pax, and goes to give it to the Bishop, who gives it to the first and second assistant deacons. The celebrant gives it also to the deacon. But the sub-deacon receives it from the assistant priest, and then gives it to the first clergyman on each side of the sanctuary, as in other High Masses. If the celebrant gives communion, the Bishop kneels as at the elevation ; after Communion, the Bishop reads the communion in the Missal, and sits with his mitre on. 11. At the Dominus vobiscum, the Bishop and the clergy rise, and stand during the prayers. The celebrant does not give the blessing, but the Bishop gives it solemnly, as usual ; after which the celebrant publishes the Indulgence, and finishes Mass, as usual. 12. After Mass, the celebrant, with the deacon and sub- deacon, and the acolytes, with their candlesticks, having made a genuflection to the cross, and bowed to the Bishop and clergy, go to the sacristy. The Bishop takes off the sacred vestments, puts on the cape and pectoral cross, and having prayed a short time before the altar, retires, accom- panied by the clergy. CHAPTER VIII. OF SOLEMN MASS, CELEBRATED IN PRESENCE OF THE BISHOP, NOT DRESSED IN COPE AND MITRE, BUT ONLY IN ROCHET AND CAPE. 1. Everything is to be observed as in the preceding chapter, with the following exceptions : 292 VESPERS FOR THE DEAD. 2. The Bishop is incensed only at the Offertory. 3. The celebrant is incensed, as usual, at the beginning of Mass, after the Gospel, and at the Offertory, twice only on each occasion. 4. The Bishop may go from the sacristy to the sanctuary, at the same time with the celebrant, but behind him, im- mediately preceded by the assistant priest, and having at his side the two assistant deacons ; he may likewise return to the sacristy behind the celebrant in the same manner. CHAPTER IX. VESPERS FOR THE DEAD. CELEBRATED BY THE BISHOP. 1. The Bishop at these Vespers w r ears the cape, or the pontifical mantle,* over his rochet. He sits in his stall in the choir, or on his seat, but without assistant priests and deacons. 2. Vespers are begun with the antiphon, Placebo Domino, sung by the choir, during which the Bishop and the clergy stand with their heads uncovered. When they begin the Psalm, Dilexiy they all sit and put on their caps. When the Magnificat is begun, they all take them off, and rise. They sit down again, whilst the choir repeats the antiphon after the Magnificat; after which the Bishop says, in an audible voice, Pater noster, which is secretly continued and finished by all, kneeling. 3. At the same time, two acolytes, with their candlesticks and lighted candles, and a third one with the book, come before the Bishop, who says, still kneeling, Et ne nos indu- cas, etc., with the other verses, as in the Breviary. When he says Dominus vobiscum, he rises, and says the prayer, * The cappa magna is a full robe with a train. MATINS AND LAUDS FOR THE DEAD. 293 Requiem ceternam. Then the chanters sing Requiescant in pace. 4. Should the Bishop sit at the usual place, at the Rater noster, etc., he kneels before the faldstool, and there fin- ishes the prayers. The same thing is to be observed of Matins. CHAPTER X. MATINS AND LAUDS FOR THE DEAD. CELEBRATED BY THE BISHOP. 1. The Bishop at these Matins is vested, and sits as at Vespers. 2. Having sat for a short time, the Bishop rises, and with him all the clergy. The choir begins the Invitatorium: Regem, cui omnia vivunt, etc., during which, and the Psalm, Venite exultemus, all stand. When the Psalm of the first nocturn is begun, they all sit, and put on their caps. After the verses of the first nocturn, they all rise, with their heads uncovered, and say in secret the Rater noster; after which, the Bishop and the clergy sit down. The Lessons are sung by the clergy in the middle of the sanctuary at the desk. The same is done in the other nocturns. 3. After the ninth response, Lauds are said, the Bishop and the clergy sitting. When the Benedictus is begun, they all rise, with their heads uncovered. Whilst the antiphon is repeated after.it, they sit and cover their heads. 4. After the antiphon, they rise, the acolytes go with the candlesticks and the book before the Bishop, and every- thing is done as at Vespers. 294 PONTIFICAL MASS CHAPTER XL SOLEMN PONTIFICAL MASS FOR THE DEAD. Article I. Things to be Prepared. 1. The altar should be dressed in the plainest manner, having on it the cross and six candlesticks with candles of unbleached wax ; before it a black antipendium. The canopy on the tabernacle, if there is the Blessed Sacrament, should be of purple color. It is contrary to the Rubrics to put about the altar vest- ments, stools, or books, any representation of death, or white crosses.* 2. On the side-table, two candlesticks with candles of unbleached wax; the basin and ewer, and a plate with some towels; the Missal, a vase with holy water and a sprinkle, the chalice, with everything necessary for Mass. 3. On the bench of the ministers, the maniples for the deacon and sub-deacon. 4. On the altar, the Bishop's vestments, viz., a black chasuble, dalmatic, tunic, stole, and maniple, cincture, alb, and amice. The pectoral cross and ring on a plate ; and a plain white mitre. The Bishop does not use sandals, gloves, or crosier at this Mass. The tabernacle may be covered with purple, or not covered. 5. In the sacristy, a black cope for the assistant priest ; two black dalmatics, two cinctures, albs, and amices, for the two assistant deacons; also a black dalmatic and stole, with a cincture, alb, and amice, for the officiating deacon; * Cteremoniale Episc, chap, ii, lib. ii. FOR THE DEAD. 295 and a tunic, cincture, alb, and amice, for the sub-deacon. Moreover, as many black copes, chasubles, dalmatics, and tunics, with amices, albs, and cinctures, as may be required for the clergy, who assist in sacred vestments at the Pon- tifical Mass. Lastly, a cope for the Bishop, to be taken to him by an acolyte after Mass. 6. A black carpet and four candlesticks must be kept ready, in a convenient place, to be extended before the Bishop's seat after Mass, for the absolution, unless a ceno- taph or monument be erected in the middle of the church; in this case, the processional cross is to be prepared at the Epistle side. Article II. From the Beginning to the End of Mass. 1. The Bishop goes to the sacristy as usual. 2. The clergy should put on their respective vestments before the Bishop arrives at the sacristy. 3. They all go from the sacristy to the sanctuary. 4. The Bishop, having arrived at his seat, attended by the deacon and sub-deacon, and the assistant priest (the assistant deacon remaining at the ministers' bench whilst the Bishop is dressing), does not say the anthem, Ne re- minisearis, nor the Psalms which follow; but he takes off his cape, reading, from the book which is held open before him by an acolyte, the prayer, JExue, etc. ; he then washes his hands, puts on the vestments prepared on the altar, as in Art. 1, n. 4, saying the respective prayers, and having received the mitre, sits for a short time ; the assistant dea- cons go to his side, and the deacon and sub-deacon go to put on their maniples. At this Mass, whenever the ministers give anything to the celebrant, or receive it from him, they do not kiss it, nor the celebrant's hand. During the Collects, the clergy in the sanctuary, with the exception of the Bishop's assistants, kneel down, as also from the Sanctus till the Pater noster. 5. The Bishop being vested, he, and the assistants and 296 PONTIFICAL MASS. ministers, go to the altar, and take their places, as directed above. The Psalm, Judica, is not said. After the Con- fession, he says the usual prayers, goes up to the altar with the assistant priest, deacon, and sub-deacon ; he then kisses the altar, but not the Missal ; neither does he incense the cross or the altar ; having kissed the altar, he returns to his seat between the assistant deacons ; and the deacon and sub-deacon go to their seat. 6. The Bishop having returned to his seat, takes off the mitre ; the acolyte holding the book before him, he reads the Introit, and says the Kyrie, alternately with his assist- ants, which last is said likewise by the deacon and sub- deacon, and all the clergy in the sanctuary. 7. After the choir has finished singing the Kyrie, the Bishop rising, his head being uncovered, sings, Dominus vobiscum, and the Collect. He then sits with his mitre on. The sub-deacon sings the Epistle as usual ; but after it, he does not go to the Bishop to receive his blessing. The Bishop, after the sub-deacon has sung the Epistle, reads it, with the Tract and Sequentia; says, Munda cor meum, etc., but not Jube Do7nne, etc., and reads the Gospel. The deacon and sub-deacon sit at their bench. About the end of the Sequentia, the deacon carries the book to the altar, and without going to kiss the Bishop's hand, kneeling on the highest step, says, Munda cor meum, etc. The sub- deacon, at the same time, places himself before the lowest step, so as to be at the left of the deacon when he goes down ; two acolytes place themselves behind them, without candlesticks. At a signal given by the master of cere- monies, they go to sing the Gospel. The book is not in- censed before the Gospel is sung, nor the celebrant after it ; nor does the sub-deacon carry the book to the Bishop ; who, immediately after the Gospel, sings Dominus vobiscum and Oremus, reads the Offertory, and washes his hands. 8. The Bishop, having washed his hands, goes to the altar, and everything is done as before, except, 1st, the sub-deacon, before he puts water into the chalice, does not say Benedicite, etc., and the Bishop does not bless it ; 2dly, the sub-deacon does not put on the veil, nor hold the THE ABSOLUTION AFTER MASS. 297 paten ; 3dly, after having incensed the altar, the Bishop alone is incensed by the deacon. 9. At the Sanctis, four acolytes go from the sacristy into the sanctuary with four torches, as directed above, and remain kneeling till after the communion. 10. The sub-deacon, at the elevation, kneels on the lowest step of the altar at the Epistle side, and incenses the Blessed Sacrament. 11. The Pax is not given. 12. At the end of Mass, the blessing is not given. The deacon, turned towards the altar, sings, Bequiescant in pace. The Bishop, having said, Placeat tibi, begins, at the Gos- pel side, the Gospel of St. John, receives the mitre, and continues the Gospel in going to his seat. Article III. The Absolution after Mass. 1. The Bishop, having finished the Gospel at his seat, takes off the mitre, maniple, chasuble, dalmatic, and tunic, and puts on the cope, previously brought by one of the acolytes from the sacristy, then receives the mitre, and sits down. The deacon and sub-deacon take off their maniples before they help the Bishop to disrobe. If a funeral ora- tion is to be delivered, the preacher, dressed in his cassock, without surplice, after a short prayer before the altar, without asking the Bishop's blessing, but having made a profound reverence to him, goes into the pulpit, which is to be dressed with black hangings ; and having there made again a profound bow to the Bishop, he makes the sign of the cross, and begins his discourse. 2. After the funeral oration, or if there be none, after Mass, a large black cloth is spread before the Bishop's seat, and four candlesticks placed at its corners. In the meantime, the Bishop sits down, and the choir sings Libera me, etc. ; whilst this response is repeated, two aco- lytes, one with the censer and boat, the other with the holy-water vase, go to the Bishop, who, whilst the assistant priest holds the boat, puts incense into the censer and 298 THE ABSOLUTION AFTER MASS. blesses it; then he rises, his head being uncovered, and after the last Kyrie has been sung, he says the words Pater noster, in an audible voice; continues the prayer in silence, and having received the sprinkle from the assistant priest, sprinkles the black cloth three times ; he then gives him back the sprinkle and receives the censer, and incenses the cloth thrice also ; the assistant deacons holding, during all this time, the extremities of his cope on each side. Two acolytes, with candlesticks and lighted candles, now come to the foot of the Bishop's seat, and another, with the book immediately before him, and the Bishop sings, ffi ne nos, etc., with the other verses, and the prayer ;* after which he repeats, Requiem ceternam, and the chanters sing, Bequies- cant in pace, etc. ; the Bishop makes, at the same time, the sign of the cross towards the cloth. If there be a monument, or cenotaph, in the middle of the church, the absolution should be made there. All go thither in procession in the following order : two acolytes, one with the censer and boat, and the other with the holy- water vase ; the sub-deacon carrying the cross between two acolytes with candlesticks and lighted candles ; then the clergy, two by two, according to their order ; the deacon at the left of the assistant priest ; the Bishop between the two assistant deacons, followed by the acolytes, who wait on him with the mitre, book, etc., etc. ; when they reach the place, the two acolytes, with the censer and holy-water vase, stop at the head of it on the right side, and the sub- deacon, with the acolytes at his side, goes to the foot of the same place; the clergy divide into two lines, one on each side of the monument, and the Bishop sits on the faldstool in the middle, at the head of the same, where he performs what has been directed above. On particular occasions, for instance at a funeral service for the Pope, etc., besides the Bishop, there are four other prelates or priests, who, after Mass, put on copes, and per- form four absolutions before that performed by the Bishop ; they walk two by two, immediately before the assistant priest, and when they come to the cenotaph, sit on seats placed at each corner of it. Then all rise, and the assistant priest holds the book before the Bishop, who reads, Kon SOLEMN MASS FOR THE DEAD. 299 intrcs; the choir afterwards sings the response, Subvenite, and the prelate first in dignity, who is placed at the right corner at the head of the monument, attended by the dea- con, puts incense into the censer, blesses it, says, at the proper time, Pater noster, sprinkles the monument thrice at each corner, going round it, beginning on his right side, incenses it in the same manner, says, Et ne nos, and the verses and prayer as in the Roman Pontifical. Then the prelate second in dignity, who is placed at the left corner, at the foot of the monument, does the same ; so also the prelate third in dignity, placed at the left corner at the head of the monument. The same is done by the prelate fourth in dignity, who is placed at the right corner, at the foot of the monument. Last of all, the Bishop performs the same, after the Libera has been sung, as is to be found in the Roman Pontifical. But if there are no other prel- ates present, the Bishop alone is to bless the incense. CHAPTER XII. SOLEMN MASS FOR THE DEAD, CELEBRATED IN PRESENCE OF THE BISHOP. 1. The Bishop may assist at solemn Mass for the dead, either with cap and cape, or with black cope and plain mitre. 2. Should he assist in cope and mitre, his vestments are placed on the altar,, and he puts them on, as mentioned above ; but he does not use the crosier. 3. He makes the Confession at the beginning of Mass ; but he does not say the Psalm, Judica. 4. He puts incense into the censer ; but he is incensed by the assistant priest at the Offertory only, after the dea- con has incensed the celebrant twice. 5. At the Collects, he goes to the middle of the sanc- tuary, and kneels during them at the faldstool between his assistant deacons. 300 INSTRUCTIONS FOR 6. After the Sanctus, he goes likewise to the middle, and kneels till the Agnus Dei, which he says at his seat ; but the priests in the sanctuary do not go before his seat. 7. At the Post Communion, he goes again to the middle, and kneels as before ; he then returns to his seat, but he does not give the blessing. 8. After Mass, he performs the absolution, observing what has been said in the foregoing chapter. CHAPTER XIII. PARTICULAR INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE DIFFERENT OFFICERS WHO ATTEND THE BISHOP. Article I. Instruction for the Assistant Priest. Section I. — His Quality, Dress, and Place. 1. The assistant priest, who, in the Pontifical, is some- times called by the name of archdeacon, is the first amongst all the ministers of the Bishop. Therefore this office should generally be exercised by the most conspicuous clergyman, who holds the first rank in the diocese. 2. His dress, when the Bishop officiates pontifically, is the amice over his surplice (or rochet, if he be entitled to wear it), and the cope. 3. He sits on a stool placed on the platform of the pon- tifical chair, and at the left of the second assistant deacon ; however, should the place not allow this arrangement, he may sit at the right of the first assistant deacon ; in either case, his stool must not be on the same line with those of the assistant deacons, but a little forward towards the steps of the platform. ASSISTANT PRIEST. 301 Section II. — His Office in general. 1. The assistant priest, after the Bishop is dressed, puts the ring on his finger; he also takes it off every time the Bishop is to wash his hands, and puts it on his finger again, and presents to him the towel ; he holds the book before the Bishop, whenever he sings anything out of it at Vespers or High Mass ; but when the Bishop reads, the book is to be held by an acolyte; he holds the incense-boat, and presents the spoon to the Bishop every time the Bishop is to put the incense into the censer, and says, Benedicite, Pater Reverendissime ; but at Mass, only when he is at his pontifical chair, for the deacon is to present it when he is at the altar at Mass. He incenses the Bishop when he is at his chair. Section III. — His Office at Pontifical Vespers. 1. The assistant priest holds the book before the Bishop when he intones the first antiphon. 2. Standing at his place he intones the third antiphon. 3. He holds the book when the Bishop intones the hymn; after the antiphon of the Magnificat has been intoned, he presents the spoon to the Bishop, to put in the incense, kissing, as usual, both the spoon and the Bishop's hand, and saying, Benedicite, etc. When the Magnificat is begun, he walks before the Bishop to the altar ; on ar- riving there, after the Bishop has kissed it, he gives him the censer with the usual kisses ; after the incensing, he takes it back, and gives it to the censer-bearer; returns to the Bishop's seat, walking before him, and there standing below the lowest step, he incenses the Bishop with three swings, goes up to his seat, is incensed with two swings, holds the book before the Bishop whilst he sings the prayer, then returns to his place, and after Vespers takes off his cope as usual. 302 PONTIFICAL MASS. Section IV. — The Office of the Assistant Pried at Pontifical 3fass. 1. As the assistant priest particularly attends the Bishop at the book, it is his duty to prepare, find, and mark, with the usual ribbons in the Missal, the Mass of the day, the commemorations, and whatever is to be read or sung by the Bishop, to w T hom he is to point out everything, and suggest what he has to sing or read. 2. The assistant priest puts on the cope over the amice, which he puts over the surplice, or rochet, if he be entitled to wear it. Whilst the Bishop reads the Psalms for the preparation of Mass, standing near the first or second as- sistant deacon, he answers together with them, and alter- nately with the Bishop ; then he offers the towel to the Bishop, when he washes his hands ; holds the book before the Bishop at the prayer of Tierce ; puts the ring on the Bishop's finger after he is vested, offers the spoon, when the Bishop puts incense into the censer, walks to the high altar at the right of the officiating deacon, places himself near the Bishop, and at his right below the lowest step, makes a genuflection, answers to the confession, making a profound bow to the Bishop, when he says Et tibi Pater, and Et te Pater. 3. When the Bishop has kissed the altar, the assistant priest holds the Missal, whilst the Bishop kisses it, and retires on the Gospel side, below the steps, during the in- censing ; after it, he walks to the Bishop's chair before him ; there he stands at his place, whilst the Bishop reads the Introit and Kyrie, to which he answers with the assist- ant deacons ; after it, he sits. He holds the Missal whilst the Bishop sings Gloria in excelsis Deo; gives it to the acolyte after the Bishop has sung those words ; holds it a^ain before him whilst he sings the prayers ; and incenses the Bishop after the Gospel. During the sermon, if the Bishop preaches at his seat, he sits at his usual place ; but if he preaches at the altar, he sits at the right of the Bishop, and the deacon at the left. After the deacon has sung the Confiteor, the assistant priest publishes the Indulgences. ASSISTANT PRIEST. 303 But if the assistant priest preaches (for he that preaches at the Pontifical Mass, ought to perform the office of assistant priest), after the Gospel, having incensed the Bishop, he asks his benediction, saying, Jube, Domne benedicerc, kisses his hand, preaches dressed as he is in cope, and after the Confiteor, sung by the deacon from the pulpit, publishes the Indulgences. 4. The Bishop having read the Offertory, the assistant priest attends him with the towel, when he washes his hands, puts the ring on his finger, carries the Missal to the altar, goes to the altar walking before the Bishop; in case, for greater convenience, the Missal was carried thither by an acolyte, the assistant priest attends the Bishop, standing at his left near the book, and turns the leaves, when neces- sary ; when the Bishop incenses the sacred offerings and the altar, the assistant priest takes the Missal with its stand from the altar, and retires with it to the Gospel side, below the steps; after the incensing, he puts it back in the same place, and remains near it to attend the Bishop. He says Sanctiis, with the Bishop, kneels only at the elevation, and makes a genuflection whenever the Bishop makes it. He says with him, Agnus Dei; after it, he exchanges place with the deacon, and when the Bishop says the first prayer, JDomine Jesu Christe, he kneels at his right ; after it, he rises, kisses the altar at the same time with the cele- brant, receives from him the Pax, approaching his left cheek to the celebrant's left cheek ; and when he has said Pax tecum, the assistant priest answers, Et cum spiritu tuo. Then he makes a genuflection, and attended by the master of ceremonies, gives the Pax to those of the clergy on each side of the sanctuary who occupy the first places or stalls on each row, making no reverence before he gives it, but only after he has given it. Lastly, he gives it to the mas- ter of ceremonies, by whom he was accompanied. 5. The assistant priest, after having given the Pax to the master of ceremonies, returns to his place, at the left of the Bishop; after the ablution, he carries the Missal from the Gospel side to the Epistle side, attends the Bishop, when he washes his hands, presenting to him the towel, goes near the book at the right of the Bishop, and when 304 PONTIFICAL MASS. the Indulgences have not been published, if there has not been any sermon, he publishes them after the Bishop has given the blessing. Section V. — The Office of the Assistant Priest, when the Bishop does not celebrate himself, but only assists at Mass or Vespers celebrated by others. 1. When the Bishop does not celebrate, but assists, either in cope, or in his large mantle, or in cape, the assistant priest attends him in his usual choral dress, viz., in sur- plice, or in rochet, if he be entitled to use it. 2. The assistant priest presents the incense-boat to the Bishop, incenses him, if he assists in cope and mitre, after the Introit, after the Gospel, and at the Offertory ; after the Agnus Dei, he goes to the altar, kneels, rises, kisses the altar, receives the Pax from the celebrant, gives it to the Bishop, who gives it to his assistant deacons, and on re- turning to his seat he gives it to the sub-deacon, by whom it is given to the clergy ; but if Mass be celebrated by a prelate who has his own assistant priest, the latter receives it from the Bishop's assistant priest, and gives it to the others. Article II. INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE TWO ASSISTANT DEACONS. Section I. — Their Quality, Dress, and Place. 1. Whenever the Bishop officiates pontifically, either for Mass or for Vespers, two clergymen, the highest in dignity next to him that performs the office of assistant priest, ought to attend the Bishop. 2. They ought to be dressed in rochet or surplice amice and dalmatic ; they wear neither maniples nor stoles. Custom permits them to wear albs, instead of rochet or surplice; and this use prevails throughout this country; it may, therefore, be followed. 3. The assistant deacons sit on each side of the Bishop, on two stools placed on the platform, whereon stands the ASSISTANT DEACONS. 305 Bishop's chair. They walk at his side, and if he is dressed in cope, they raise it, each on his own side. 4. A bishop officiating out of his diocese is not entitled to have the two assistant deacons. Section II. — The Office of the Two Assistant Deacons at the Pontifical Vespers. 1 . Whenever the Bishop kneels before the altar at the faldstool, the assistant deacons adjust the sides of his cope. 2. The second assistant deacon, at the Bishop's left, takes off the mitre, and gives it to the acolyte ; the first assistant deacon at his right takes off his cap, and gently presses down his hair, every time the Bishop is to take off his mitre. 3. The first assistant deacon, at the Bishop's right, hav- ing first put on him his cap, puts also the mitre on him, and the second assistant deacon helps him, and fixes behind him the mitre-bands every time the Bishop is to put on the mitre. Every time the Bishop raises his hand, either to make the sign of the cross on himself, or to bless some person or thing, or to put incense into the censer, or to strike his breast, or to incense the altar, or to do anything else, the first assistant deacon raises the celebrant's cope on his side; likewise, whenever the Bishop raises both his hands, when he has to read anything out of the book, or to give the solemn blessing, both assistant deacons, on each side of him, raise his cope. Whenever the Bishop sings, or reads anything from the book, the two assistant deacons, on each side, put their hands on the book, the first assist- ant deacon turns the leaves of the book, and the second points out what he has to sing or read. Section III. — The Office of the Assistant Deacons at the Pontifical Mass. 1. The assistant deacons go to the side of the Bishop, as soon as he is dressed for Tierce, and sit there till the chapter is sung. Then they rise, the second assistant dea- con takes off the Bishop's mitre, and they both attend him 26 306 PONTIFICAL MASS. standing till Tierce is finished; then they give their places to the deacon and sub-deacon. When the Bishop has put on all the vestments for Mass, they return to his side, walk with him to the altar, where, being arrived, the sec- ond assistant deacon takes off his mitre, and they make a genuflection ; the first assistant deacon gives his place to the assistant priest, the second assistant deacon to the offi- ciating deacon, and retiring each behind him to whom he gave way, remain there answering, and bowing profoundly at the Confiteor ; during the incensing, they go up to the second step, the first assistant deacon towards the Epistle side, and the second assistant deacon towards the Gospel side, and remain there till it is finished ; then the first assistant deacon puts the mitre on the Bishop ; after the Bishop has been incensed, they both go at his side to the pontifical chair, the second assistant deacon takes off his mitre, they both attend him standing whilst he reads the Introit and Kyrie, to which they answer; then the first assistant deacon (if the choir have not done singing the Kyrie) puts on him the mitre, and both seat themselves. The Kyrie being sung, they rise; the second assistant deacon takes off the Bishop's mitre; they attend him whilst he reads the Gloria, and when he has finished it, and seated himself, the first assistant deacon puts the mitre on him. After the Gloria has been sung by the choir, they both rise, the second assistant deacon takes off the Bishop's mitre, and* both attend him, whilst he sings the prayer and the Collects ; after which, the first assistant deacon puts on him the mitre, and they both sit, whilst the Epistle is sung ; they rise after it, and, standing, attend the Bishop, whilst he reads the Epistle, Tract, etc., and Gospel, and whilst he puts the incense into the censer; they then sit ; when the Bishop has given the blessing to the deacon, and the latter is about to begin the Gospel, they both rise; the second assistant deacon takes off the Bishop's mitre, and they stand whilst the Gospel is sung ; after the Bishop has been incensed, if there is a sermon, the first assistant deacon puts the mitre on him, and they sit during the sermon ; after it the second assistant deacon takes off the Bishop's mitre before he sings the absolution ; ASSISTANT DEACONS. 307 after it, the first assistant deacon puts the mitre on him ; at the blessing, they both bow profoundly and make the sign of the cross on themselves ; after the blessing, the second assistant deacon takes off the Bishop's mitre ; they both standing attend him, and with him say the Credo ; they kneel at the Incarnatus ; the Creed being ended, the first assistant deacon puts the mitre on the Bishop ; whilst the Incarnatus is sung, they make a profound bow. The Creed being sung, they rise, the second assistant deacon takes off the Bishop's mitre, and standing they attend him whilst he says the Offertory ; after it, the first assistant deacon puts the mitre on him, takes off his glove from his right hand, and the second assistant deacon from his left, and they give them to the master of ceremonies. After he has washed his hands, they go at his side to the altar, but the officiating deacon takes off the mitre, they make a genuflection, go up to the second step, remain there whilst the Bishop is at the altar ; the first assistant deacon puts on him the mitre before he is incensed, and takes it off after the incensing ; at the elevation they both kneel down at their place, and likewise at the blessing. After the assistant priest has received the Pax, they go to the Bishop's right, make a genuflection without kissing the altar, and receive from the Bishop the Pax. Mass being ended, they accompany the Bishop to his seat, where, hav- ing made him a profound bow, they give their places to the deacon and sub-deacon, go to the sacristy, disrobe, put on their surplices, and go to accompany the Bishop to his house, or to the sacristy* . Section IV. — The Office of the Assistant Deacons, when the Bishop does not celebrate. 1. In this case, they attend the Bishop in their choral dress, viz., in surplice, or rochet if they have the privilege of using it ; they do what has been said in the preceding article, with regard to the mitre, the incense, and the place where they must remain. When the Bishop, at Mass, goes to kneel down before the faldstool or desk, in the 308 PONTIFICAL MASS. middle of the sanctuary, they go with him, and kneel at his side. The two assistant deacons are to attend only the Bishop in his own diocese ; not even Legates have the right of their attendance. However, if the Ordinary should be willing to confer this honor on any Bishop, whom he has invited to officiate in his place, he may give him the two assistant deacons. Article III. INSTRUCTION FOR THE OFFICIATING DEACON. 1. The officiating deacon puts on all the sacred vest- ments belonging to his order, except the maniple. 2. During Tierce, he sits at his usual place, at the right of the sub-deacon, until the Bishop has read the Psalms and prayers for the preparation of Mass. 3. After the Bishop has read the prayer above men- tioned, the officiating deacon goes with the sub-deacon to the Bishop's seat, and having made to him a profound bow, goes to his right, and there standing, after he has washed his hands, receives every one of the Bishop's vest- ments from the acolytes who carry them, and vests the Bishop, assisted by the sub-deacon. 4. The Bishop being vested, the deacon returns, with the sub-deacon, to the bench, where they remain till after Tierce is over. 5. After Tierce, the officiating deacon goes again with the sub-deacon to the Bishop's seat, and at his right takes off from him the cope, and puts on him the other vest- ments for Mass ; then he returns with the sub-deacon to the bench, and puts on his maniple. 6. The officiating deacon goes to the altar for the begin- ning of Mass; if Tierce has been sung, and the Bishop has put on the sacred vestments in the chapel, prepared for this purpose, he walks in procession to the high altar, at the left of the assistant priest, immediately before the Bishop ; otherwise, from the bench, he goes before the last step of the altar, at the left of the Bishop, and there answers him OFFICIATING DEACOX. 309 at the Confession as usual ; goes up to the altar, and stand- ing at the Bishop's right, presents the incense-boat and the spoon, with the usual kiss of the latter, and of the Bishop's hand, and says, Benedicite, Pater Reverendissime, receives the censer from the censer-bearer, gives it to the Bishop, kissing the upper part of the chain, which he puts into the Bishop's left hand, and the lower part near the cover into his right hand, which he kisses, attends the Bishop, kneels whenever he kneels, and makes a profound bow when the Bishop bows, raises with his left hand the Bishop's chasuble on his side, and supports his arm whenever he makes a genuflection. After the incensing, he receives with the usual kiss the censer from the Bishop, goes below the last step on the Epistle side of the altar, and after making a profound bow to the Bishop, he incenses him with three swings, and makes again a profound bow to him. 7. When the Bishop goes to his chair, the officiating deacon returns to the bench, where he stands till the Bishop has said Kyrie eleison, which he also says alternately with the sub-deacon. Then he sits, rises when the Bishop says, Gloria in excelsis Deo, which likewise the officiating deacon continues together with the sub-deacon. Having finished it, he sits. He rises at the Pax vobis, or Dominits vobiscum ; stands during the prayer and collects, and sits again during the Epistle sung by the sub-deacon. 8. Whilst the choir sings the gradual, or Alleluia, the officiating deacon receives from the master of ceremonies the Missal, carries it shut before his breast to the altar, saluting the clergy, making a profound bow to the Bishop, and a genuflection on the last step ; lays it on the middle of the altar ; goes to the Bishop, making the usual rever- ences, kisses his hand, returns to the altar, kneeling on the lowest step, in the middle, says with a low voice, Munda cor meum, rises, takes the book from the altar, returns to the Bishop at the right of the sub-deacon, after having made a genuflection, and salutes the clergy, first on the Epistle side, then on the Gospel side, kneels down with the sub-deacon and acolytes, and says Jube, Domne, benedicere. After receiving the blessing, he goes to the place where the Gospel is sung, puts the book open into the hands of the 310 PONTIFICAL MASS. sub-deacon, and turned towards the wall of the sanctuary, on the Gospel side, with his hands joined before his breast, sings Dominus vobiscum ; when he says Sequentia, or Initium 8. Evangelii, he makes with his thumb the sign of the cross on his forehead, mouth, and breast. Whilst the choir an- swers, Gloria tibi, etc., he receives the censer from the mas- ter of ceremonies or the censer- bearer, incenses the book with three swings, one in the middle, the second on the right, the third on the left side of the book, gives back the censer, and, with his hands joined, sings the Gospel. 9. The officiating deacon, having sung the .Gospel, and made a genuflection before the altar, returns to his place. If the Bishop preaches from the altar, immediately after the sermon, the officiating deacon, at the left of the Bishop, bowing a little towards him, sings the Confiteor, and at the words Et tibi Pater, and Et te Pater, makes a profound bow. But when any other besides the Bishop preaches, the officiating deacon goes to the Bishop's chair, and stand- ing below the lowest step, sings the Confiteor, as before directed. 10. At the Credo, the officiating deacon rises, and con- tinues it together with the sub-deacon, reciting it at the same time with the Bishop, and kneeling likewise with him at Incarnatus est; and whilst the same verse is sung by the choir, he remains profoundly inclined ; then he goes to the side-table, takes the burse with the corporal, which he carries to the altar supported by both his hands, raising it to the height of his eyes, walking slowly, and saluting the clergy, making a bow to the Bishop, and a genuflection to the cross, he goes up, spreads the corporal in the middle, places the burse on the Gospel side, makes a genuflection, returns directly by the side steps to his place, and sits down. 11. After the Creed has been sung, the officiating deacon goes to the altar at the same time with the Bishop, places himself at his right, takes off his mitre, makes a genuflec- tion, goes up to the altar with him, raising a little his vest- ments in front, goes to the corner of the altar at the Epistle side, takes off one of the particles from the paten, gives the OFFICIATING DEACON. 311 paten with the other particle, after having kissed it, to the Bishop, kissing also his hand. 12. Whilst the Bishop says Suscipe, Sancte Pater, the officiating deacon takes the chalice, wipes it with the puri- fier, puts wine into it, and after the sub-deacon has put in some drops of water, he wipes with the purifier all the drops that may be within on the sides of the chalice, kisses the foot of the chalice, holding it with his left hand, and the knob under the cup with his right ; gives it to the Bishop, kissing his hand, then supporting the Bishop's arm with his left hano\., and touching the chalice with his right, he says with the Bishop, Offerimus tibi, Domine, etc., and when the Bishop has placed the chalice on the corporal, the offi- ciating deacon covers it. 13. When the censer-bearer comes to -the altar, the officiating deacon receives from him the incense-boat, attends the Bishop whilst he puts in the incense, gives him the censer, assists him at the incensing, as directed above ; observing, moreover, at the incensing of the sacred offer- ings, to hold with his left hand the Bishop's vestments, to prevent their embarrassing him, or touching the offerings, and with his right the foot of the chalice; which he also removes from the middle, at the incensing of the cross, and replaces afterwards. 14. After the Bishop has incensed the altar, the deacon receives from him the censer, and incenses him as directed in n. 6 ; then he incenses the assistant priest, the first and second assistant deacons, with two swings (but in case other Bishops and prelates are present in the sanctuary, they should be incensed with three swings immediately after the Bishop who celebrates) ; afterwards he incenses with one swing, the clergy in the sanctuary. On returning to the altar, he incenses the sub-deacon with two swings, gives the censer to the censer-bearer, goes to his place on the highest step behind the Bishop, turns towards the censer- bearer, by whom he is incensed. 15. The officiating deacon remains there till after the Preface is sung ; then he goes up to the right of the Bishop, and says with him Sanctus, etc., after which he returns to his place. At the words Quam oblationem, he goes up to the 312 PONTIFICAL MASS. right of the Bishop ; if there be a pyx with small particles to be consecrated, he places it before the Bishop, and un- covers it, kneels on the edge of the platform during the consecration and elevation of the Host, raising the Bishop's chasuble ; and when he has placed the Host on the altar, the officiating deacon rises at the same time with him; after he has made the genuflection, he covers the pyx, and places it behind the chalice, uncovers the chalice, kneels again, and raises the chasuble during the elevation. When the Bishop lowers the chalice on the altar, the officiating dea- con rises, covers it, makes a genuflection with him, and returns to his place behind him. Every time the Bishop makes the sign of the cross, either on the sacred offerings or on himself, the officiating deacon takes care that his vestments should not touch the offerings. 16. When the Bishop says Benedicts et prcestas nobis, the officiating deacon goes up to his right, uncovers the chalice, making a genuflection every time he uncovers it, with the Bishop, before and after. When the Bishop makes the sign of the cross on the sacred offerings, saying, Per ipsum et cum ipso, the officiating deacon puts two fingers of his right hand on the foot of the chalice ; and when the Bishop puts the Host on the corporal, he covers the chalice, and returns to his place behind the Bishop. 17. Towards the end of the Pater, when the Bishop says Et dimitte nobis, the officiating deacon goes up to his right, having previously made a genuflection ; receives from the sub-deacon the paten, wipes it with the purifier, kisses it, and when the Bishop says Libera 7ios, puts it into the celebrant's right hand, which he kisses; when the Bishop places the paten under the Host, the officiating deacon uncovers the chalice, and covers it again, after the Bishop has put into it the small part of the Host, making a genuflection, which he always does when at his side. 18. The officiating deacon says the Agnus Dei, with the celebrant, then makes a genuflection, exchanges place with the assistant priest, by going to the Bishop's left; there he makes a genuflection, and attends the Bishop at the Missal. If the officiating deacon does not receive the communion, after the second assistant deacon has received the Pax from OFFICIATING DEACON. 313 the Bishop, he goes to receive it, making a genuflection first at the Bishop's left, then at his right ; but he does not kiss the altar. Having received the Pax, he returns to his place, making a genuflection on each side of the Bishop. 19. When the assistant priest returns to the Bishop's left, after having given the Pax to the clergy, the officiating deacon returns to the Bishop's right. There he presents wine for the ablution of the chalice, and wine and water for the ablution of the Bishop's fingers, and puts the puri- fier on his fingers over the chalice. 20. But if communion is to be given by the Bishop, and if the deacon and sub-deacon are to receive it, immediately after the Bishop has consumed the Precious Blood, the officiating deacon covers the chalice, makes a genuflection, places the pyx with the consecrated Hosts before the chal- ice, uncovers it, makes a genuflection, kneels at the right of the sub-deacon on the edge of the platform, receives from the Bishop first the Pax, and answers, Et cum spiritu tuo, then the communion, rises, goes to the Epistle side, bows somewhat, having his face turned to the Gospel side, and sings the Confiteor, making a profound bow towards the Bishop at the words Et tibi Pater, and Et te Pate?-. When he does not receive communion, he says the Confiteor before the celebrant takes the first ablution, as directed above ; after the celebrant has said Indulgentiam, etc., he changes place with the sub-deacon, and going to the Gospel side, he makes a genuflection in the middle ; takes the paten, holds it under the sacred Host, and accompanies the hand of the Bishop, as he gives the communion, going with the paten to the railing, if the people are to receive the com- munion; after it he returns to the altar, goes to the Epistle side, and presents the wine and water for the ablutions. 21. After the ablutions, the officiating deacon puts the mitre on the Bishop, and, after he has washed his hands, takes it oif, and goes behind him, follows him to the mid- dle, and then back to the Epistle side, returns again behind him to the middle, and when the Bishop has sung Dominus vobiscum, after the last prayer, the officiating deacon, turned to the people, sings, Ite, Missa est, or, if the Mass so re- 27 314 PONTIFICAL MASS. quire, remaining turned to the altar, he sings Benedicamus Domino. 22. Before the Bishop gives the solemn blessing, the officiating deacon puts the mitre on him ; unless the cele- brant be an Archbishop, who does not wear it. In this case, after the Archbishop has given the blessing, and the Indulgences have been published, the officiating deacon takes off the pallium, and lays it on the altar, receives the blessing standing, but bowing profoundly ; accompanies the Bishop to the Gospel side, where he begins the Gospel of St. John, or reads it entirely, goes below the steps of the altar, makes a genuflection ; accompanies the Bishop to his seat, and assists him in taking off the sacred vest- ments. When the Bishop has washed his hands, he puts on him the cape, gives his place to the first assistant deacon, or to one of the two other clergymen who come to the side of the Bishop, and returns to the sacristy, where he dis- robes, and then retires. Aeticle IY. Instruction for the Sub-deacon officiating at Pontifical Mass. 1. The sub-deacon, at a proper time, puts on all the vestments belonging to his order, except the maniple. 2. During Tierce, he sits at the bench as usual, at the left of the deacon, until the master of ceremonies comes to invite him to go to the side-table ; he lays his cap on the bench, takes the plate on which are the Bishop's stockings and sandals, carries them, covered with a veil, and raised to the height of his eyes, and, assisted by some acolytes, puts them on the Bishop's right and left foot. Then he returns to the bench, and remains there till the Bishop has read the Psalms and prayers of the preparation for Mass. 3. After the Bishop has read them, the sub-deacon goes with the deacon to the Bishop's seat, and having made to him a profound bow, goes to his left, and there standing, after he has washed his hands, helps the deacon to vest the Bishop. 4. The Bishop being vested, the sub-deacon returns SUB-DEACON. 315 with the deacon to the bench, and remains there till after Tierce is over. 5. After Tierce, the sub-deacon goes again with the deacon to the Bishop's seat, and standing at his left, assists the deacon to take off the Bishop's cope, and to put on him the other vestments for Mass ; then he returns with the deacon to the bench, and puts on his maniple. 6. When the Bishop is ready to proceed to the altar, the sub-deacon receives from the master of ceremonies the Missal, with the Bishop's maniple in it, and carrying it shut before his breast, walks to the altar before the deacon, either from the chapel or Secretarium in procession, or from his bench goes to the Gospel side, at the left of the deacon, but a little behind him, makes a genuflection, gives the Missal to the master of ceremonies, answers the Bishop at the confession, as usual, making him a profound bow at the words Et tibi Pater, and Et te Pater; and while the Bishop says Indulgentiam, etc., takes the Bishop's maniple from the book, kisses it on one side, and offers it to the Bishop to kiss, puts it on his left arm, and kisses the Bishop's hand. When the Bishop goes up to the altar, he follows him with the Missal, and on the Gospel side, with the help of the assistant priest, offers the Bishop the Missal open, and pointing out the beginning of the Gospel of that day to be kissed. The sub-deacon gives it to the master of ceremonies, remains at the left of the Bishop, and attends him, whilst he puts incense into the censer, and incenses the altar, raising with his right hand the Bishop's chasuble on his side, and making a genuflection every time he passes before the middle. 7. After the incensing of the altar, the sub-deacon goes below the steps by the Epistle side, and remains at the left of the deacon, whilst he incenses the Bishop, making with him the usual bows ; then he goes with him to the bench, stands there at his left, whilst the Bishop reads the Introit, and says the Kyrie, which he says alternately with the deacon ; sits till the Kyrie is finished by the choir ; rises at the Gloria in exeelsis, says the rest of it together with the deacon ; afterwards he sits at the same time as the deacon, and all the others, whilst it is sung j makes a bow, and 316 PONTIFICAL MASS. takes off his cap at the words Adoramus, gr edicts, suscipe, Jesu Christe; at the end of it, he rises, and stands during the Collect. When the Bishop says Per Dominium nostrum, or the words of the conclusion of the last prayer, the sub- deacon receives the Missal from the master of ceremonies, goes to the middle, holding it with both his hands, and leaning it towards his breast, he makes a genuflection to the altar, a profound bow to the Bishop, and a moderate bow to the clergy, first on the Gospel side, then on the Epistle side; goes to his place below the last step, and turned to the Bishop, without turning his back to the altar, he sings the Epistle, supporting with both his arms the book open. 8. After the Epistle, the sub-deacon goes again to the middle, makes a genuflection to the altar, a bow to the Bishop, and to the clergy on the Epistle side, and the Gos- pel side, goes to the Bishop, kneels before him, rests the book on his knees, and kisses his hand, as he puts it on the book, rises, returns to the bench, and gives the book to the master of ceremonies ; then he goes to the middle, at the left of the deacon, makes a genuflection, salutes the clergy at the Epistle side, and at the Gospel side, walks, at the left of the deacon, to the Bishop's seat, and makes a profound bow. On arriving before it, he kneels whilst the deacon says, Jub'e Domne, etc., and during the blessing ; then he rises, makes a profound bow to the Bishop, walks to the place where the Gospel is sung, receives the book in his hand, and supports it on his head open before the dea- con ; and whilst the deacon sings, he remains without moving. 9. When the deacon has done singing the Gospel, the sub-deacon, still holding the book open, without making any bow, carries it to the Bishop to kiss the beginning of the Gospel. When the Bishop has kissed it, the sub-deacon shuts the book, bows to the Bishop, and returns to the bench, making a genuflection to the altar as he passes before it. 10. At the Credo, the sub-deacon rises, says it together with the deacon, and at the same time with the Bishop, kneels at the Inearnatus; and having finished the Credo, SUB-DEACON. 317 sits with the rest of the clergy. Whilst the Ineamatus is sung, the sub-deacon remains profoundly inclined. After the Ineamatus, he rises, standing, waits till the deacon returns from the altar, and sits. 11. At the Offertory, the sub-deacon rises, goes to the side-table, puts on his shoulder the long veil, and lets it hang lower on his right side, takes hold of the chalice with his left hand, covers it with the longest part of the veil hanging on his right, and places his right hand open over it ; then he goes to the altar, whither he should arrive at the same time with the Bishop, uncovers the chalice, gives it to the deacon ; then he gives also to the deacon, the wine-cruet which he has received from the acolyte, and having received the water-cruet, he presents it to the Bishop, saying, Benedicite, Peverendissime Pater, and puts a few drops of water into the chalice. 12. After the oblation of the chalice, the sub-deacon receives the paten from the deacon in his bare hand, and covers it with the longest part of the veil hanging on his right ; then he goes down below the lowest step in the middle, holding the paten against his breast; but when he has arrived there, he keeps it raised to the height of his eyes, supporting his elbow with his left hand. There he remains without moving, except only to kneel in the same place, and on the lowest step, for the elevation. When the celebrant says those words of the Pater Noster, Et dimitte nobis, etc., the sub-deacon makes a genuflection, goes up to the altar at the Epistle side, gives the paten to the deacon, takes off the long veil, makes a genuflection, returns below the steps in the middle, takes the place of the deacon at the Bishop's right, whilst the same deacon keeps that of the assistant priest at the left, and uncovers the chalice when required, kneeling with the Bishop. The sub-deacon re- ceives the Pax after the deacon at the usual time. When the deacon sings or recites the Conjiteor, the sub-deacon goes to the Gospel side, and remains turned to the opposite side, till the Bishop has said Indulgentiam, etc., then he changes places with the deacon, and goes to the Epistle side, remaining by the Bishop, and accompanying him to the railing for the communion of the people. Returning 318 PONTIFICAL MASS. to the altar, the sub-deacon goes to the Epistle side, puts wine and water into the chalice for the ablutions ; puts the purifier on the Bishop's fingers, unless the deacon has already returned to that side, and is there ready to minister for the ablutions; then he goes to the Gospel side, wipes the chalice, puts on it the purifier, paten, pall, veil, and burse with the corporal ; takes hold of it with his left, and places his right hand on it, goes down, makes a genuflec- tion on the last step, and carries it to the side-table, returns to his place, below the last step, behind the Bishop, whom he follows, when he goes to the middle. At the blessing the sub-deacon goes up on the highest step, receives it, profoundly bowing, takes in his hand the book, or the altar card, and presents it to the Bishop, to read the Gos- pel of St. John. After the Bishop has read this, the sub- deacon goes to his left side and helps the deacon to disrobe him. Which being done, he goes to the sacristy, puts off the sacred vestments, and retires. Article V. INSTRUCTION FOR THE INFERIOR MINISTERS WHO AT- TEND THE BISHOP AT PONTIFICAL MASS AND OTHER FUNCTIONS. Section I. — The Master of Ceremonies. 1. There should be two masters of ceremonies ; the first, if possible, should be either a priest, or at least in sacred orders. 2. The office of the first master of ceremonies, is to direct and conduct the whole ceremony ; he should, therefore, be perfectly acquainted with what is to be done by the cele- brant and all the officers. He ought to be familiar with all the instructions given in the present work, which he ought to read frequently ; and especially he ought to re- fresh his memory, by looking at the particular ceremonies to be performed, the day before. 3. He ought to take especial care of what is to be per- CROSIER-BEARER. 319 formed by the Bishop, either at his seat or at the altar, or in any other place, and always be near him. 4. The second master of ceremonies assists the first ; he ought to be likewise well conversant with this book ; and his particular duty is to attend the ministers, and he should therefore remain near them. 5. During Mass, the masters of ceremonies never sit, except during the sermon. They must stand, with their heads uncovered, whilst the rest of the clergy sit, the first master of ceremonies below the steps of the Bishop's seat, the second near the bench of the ministers ; and a little before a reverence is to be made, or a genuflection, they ought to give a signal to the clergy. At the Incarnatus, and at the blessing, they kneel down. 6. At the procession, and when the clergy go from the sacristy to the church, and from the church to the sacristy, the masters of ceremonies never wear their caps, neither do they carry them. 7. At Vespers they may sit during the Psalms; but they must rise before the Gloria Patri, to give the signal to the clergy to bow. 8. The second master of ceremonies, at the altar, gives the Bishop's vestments to the acolytes when he is to be vested, and receives them back likewise at the altar, when he takes them off. Section II. — Instruction for the Crosier-bearer, 1. The crosier-bearer, when the Bishop celebrates Mass, or Vespers, pontifically, may be dressed in surplice and cope ; at least, he must be in surplice. 2. He holds continually in his hand the Bishop's crosier, whenever the Bishop does not use it. He must watch the time, in which he is to give or receive the crosier, and be always ready. 3. The crosier-bearer sits either on the steps of the Bish- op's chair, or at any other convenient place near it. He must stand whenever the Bishop stands. 4. When the Bishop walks, either from the chair to the altar, or from the sacristy to the sanctuary, the crosier- 320 PONTIFICAL MASS. bearer walks after him, at the right hand of the mitre- bearer ; . he likewise stands at the right of the mitre-bearer, at a certain distance from the lowest step, when the Bishop is at the altar, and kneels there at the elevation and com- munion. 5. In processions, when the Bishop uses the crosier, and carries it, the crosier-bearer walks behind him ; but at the procession of the blessed Sacrament, when the Bishop does not carry the crosier, and on similar occasions, the crosier- bearer walks alone in the middle, immediately before the clergy, dressed in sacred vestments, and carries the crosier erect with both hands. Section III. — Instruction for the Mitre-bearer. 1. The mitre-bearer may wear the cope over his surplice, when the Bishop celebrates Mass or Vespers pontifically ; at least, he ought to be in surplice, and wear a long white silk veil, hanging from his neck ; with the lower part of which he covers his hands, whenever he holds the mitre. 2. He goes to receive it at the altar, from the master of ceremonies, when the Bishop is to be dressed ; goes with the others before him to his seat, and carries it back to the altar, after the Bishop is disrobed. 3. He sits either on the steps near the Bishop's chair or in any other convenient place ; he holds the mitre when- ever the Bishop does not use it ; he must watch the moment in which he is to give or receive it, and be always ready ; he gives it to the deacon that is at the Bishop's right hand, and receives it from the deacon that is at his left. 4. The mitre-bearer must stand whenever the Bishop stands. When the Bishop walks, either from his chair to the altar, or from the sacristy to the sanctuary, the mitre- bearer walks after him, at the left hand of the crosier- bearer ; he likewise stands at his left, at a certain distance from the lowest step of the altar, and kneels there at the elevation and communion. 5. As the Bishop generally uses two mitres, the precious and the plain mitre, the mitre-bearer must give the precious mitre whenever the Bishop first puts it on, after having BOOK-BEARER. 321 vested ; at Vespers, after the first Psalm has been com- menced, the mitre-bearer places the precious mitre on the altar, at the Epistle side, and carries the lighter mitre to the deacon. At the beginning of the antiphon, before the Magnificat, he carries the lighter mitre to the altar, and the precious mitre to the deacon. At Mass, the mitre-bearer, at the beginning of the Gloria in excekis, carries the pre- cious mitre to the altar, and the lighter mitre to the deacon, which the Bishop uses till the end of the Credo. Then the mitre-bearer carries the precious mitre to the deacon, and the lighter mitre to the altar. The Bishop uses the precious mitre till the end of Mass, whenever he has to put it on ; therefore, the mitre-bearer holds it in his hand while the Bishop is at the altar, standing or kneeling, as has been said before. When he holds the mitre, the bands must al- ways be outside, and hang down. 6. In processions, the mitre-bearer walks always behind the Bishop. Section IV. — Instruction for the Book-bearer. 1. The book-bearer is dressed in surplice. He should take care that the marks be at the proper place in the Mis- sal, and hold it. 2. He sits in a convenient place by the candle-bearer ; watches the moment in which the book is necessary, and at the first token given by the master of ceremonies, he car- ries it to the Bishop. When the Bishop reads standing, the book-bearer holds it likewise standing; when the Bishop sings anything out of the book at his chair, the book-bearer gives it to the assistant priest, who is to hold it only dur- ing that time; then he receives it back; when the Bishop reads anything sitting, the book-bearer holds it kneeling down. Holding the book, he places the upper end of it on his forehead, and holds the lower on his hands. He never kneels nor bows whilst he is holding the book before the Bishop. 322 PONTIFICAL MASS. Section V. — Instruction for the Candle-bearer. 1. The candle-bearer, who carries and holds the hand- candlestick, which is used whenever the Bishop officiates, is dressed in surplice ; he sits, and remains at the right of the book-bearer; accompanies him whenever he carries the book to the Bishop's chair, and remains at his side with the candlestick in his hand, but always standing whilst the Bishop reads or sings anything. 2. The book-bearer, moreover, goes to the altar, and there, always at the side in which is the Missal, stands by the assistant priest, holding the candle near the book. PART VI. 'iher Solemn ©flkes, AT WHICH THE BISHOP OFFICIATES OR IS PRESENT. CHAPTER I. COMMEMORATION OF ALL THE FAITHFUL DEPARTED. 1. On All-Saints' Day, for the second Vespers, a black altar veil is to be placed under the white one ; the latter is to be removed by the acolytes, soon after the solemn Vespers of the day. 2. After these Vespers, the Bishop and the clergy take off the sacred vestments, the Bishop at his seat, and the clergy (as quickly as possible) in the sacristy ; the latter return to the sanctuary, and the Bishop goes to his choir- stall, if there be such, otherwise he remains in his seat, without an assistant priest and deacon. 3. Vespers for the dead are sung as directed in Part V of this book, chapter ix. 4. After Vespers, in Cathedral churches, Matins and Lauds for the dead are sung, as directed in Part V, chapter x. 5. The next day, a Pontifical Mass is celebrated by the Bishop, as in Part V, chapter xi. 6. After Mass, the absolution is made by the Bishop, either at his seat, or at the cenotaph, as directed in Part V, chapter xi. 324 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. CHAPTER II. SUNDAYS IN ADVENT. 1. If the Bishop officiates on these Sundays, the assist- ant deacons, the officiating deacon, and sub-deacon, instead of dalmatics, use folded chasubles, which have the same form as the usual chasubles, but that part which hangs be- fore is shorter, and does not hang further than the cincture. Where there are none for this purpose, the others may be used, if folded. The same are used by the ministers for all High Masses celebrated either in the presence or in the absence of the Bishop. However, on the third Sunday in Advent, the ministers use dalmatics and tunics of rose color. If the fourth Sunday falls on Christmas Eve, dalmatics of violet color are also used. 2. The Bishop, instead of Pax vobis, says Dominus vobiscum. 3. The sub-deacon, whilst the celebrant sings the last Collect, takes off his folded chasuble, sings the Epistle without it, and having received the Bishop's blessings, puts on the folded chasuble again. 4. The deacon also, before the first Alleluia is sung, takes off his chasuble, puts on the large stole over the other, and remains so till after the celebrant's communion ; he then takes off the large stole, and puts on the folded chasuble. 5. What has been said above, n. 3 and 4, is to be ob- served also in other High Masses, celebrated either in the presence or in the absence of the Bishop. CHAPTER III. CHRISTMAS. 1. On Christmas Eve, the first Vespers are sung as directed, page 262. CHRISTMAS. 325 2. The following night, Matins are song as directed, page 267. 3. What follows is to be particularly observed for these Matins. 4. The church and sanctuary must be illuminated with a sufficient number of candles. 5. Another table, besides the usual side-table, is to be prepared, and all the sacred vestments for the Pontifical Mass should be placed on it ; also a cope to be worn by the Bishop during the Te Deum. 6. At the third nocturn, whilst the choir sings the Psalm, Misericord ias Domini, the Bishop, attended by the two assistants in surplice, reads the antiphon and Psalms for the preparation of Mass, out of the book, which is held open before him by an acolyte, who has at his side another acolyte with a candlestick ; and in the meantime the Bishop's stockings and sandals are put on. The deacon and sub-deacon go also, at the beginning of the third nocturn, to the sacristy, where they put on the sacred vest- ments. The Bishop ought to finish the preparation in time to be ready to sing, A vinculis, etc., before the lessons. The two assistants, after the preparation, return to their seats ; but they go again to the side of the Bishop, when he sings the last Lesson ; after which, having intoned the Te Deum, the deacon and sub-deacon go to his side, and the two assistants go to put on the sacred vestments ; the acolytes, with the book and candlestick, go before the Bishop ; the master of ceremonies, having given the Bishop's vestments to the acolytes, goes also with them before the Bishop, who, after having put on the stole, receives the cope, and remains standing till the end of the Te Deum; he then sings Dominus vobiscum and the prayer; after which he repeats Dominus vobiscum, and whilst the singers sing, Benedicamus Domino, the Bishop takes off the cope, puts on the other vestments for Mass, which he celebrates as usual. During the Te Deum, the clergy put on the sacred vestments. 7. At the Incarnalus, the Bishop and all the clergy kneel. 8. The Bishop does not take the ablutions, because he 326 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. is to sing the third Mass • he washes his fingers in another chalice or vessel. 9. Lauds are sung as directed, page 269. CHAPTER IV. FESTIVALS BETWEEN CHRISTMAS AND CANDLEMAS. 1. The Bishop may celebrate these festivals with more or less solemnity, as he thinks proper. 2. However, on New Year's day, he ought to assist at Mass in cope, as directed, page 288. 3. On the Epiphany, he ought to celebrate pontifically, as directed, page 269. On the same day, after the Gospel has been sung, a clergyman in cope goes to the pulpit, and publishes the movable feasts, singing what is prescribed for this purpose in the Roman Pontifical. 4. On other festivals, the Bishop may assist at Mass in cope or in his long robe, as directed, page 288. CHAPTER V. CANDLEMAS. Things to be Prepared. 1. In the sanctuary, between the Bishop's seat and the altar, a table entirely covered with a white linen cloth, and on it a sufficient number of candles for the Bishop and clergy. 2. On the side-table, besides everything necessary for High Mass celebrated in presence of the Bishop, the holy- water vase, the basin, ewer, towels on a plate, and some CANDLEMAS. 327 slices of bread on another plate, for cleansing the Bishop's hands ; an apron beautifully embroidered, to be put on the Bishop's knees at the distribution of the candles. 3. Near the side-table, the processional cross ; and in a convenient place the censer with the incense-boat, a chafing- dish, with fire and tongs. 4. In front of the altar, a violet veil over another of a white color, to be removed after the procession, unless the Mass be not of the Blessed Virgin. 5. On the altar, the Bishop's ornaments, viz., the violet cope and stole, the pectoral cross, the cincture, alb, amice, and mitre, besides the crosier , at the angle between the altar and the steps. 6. In the sacristy, a violet cope for the assistant priest, two violet chasubles folded, with two cinctures, albs, and amices for the assistant deacons, and violet vestments for all the clergy, as before directed. 7. The clergy put on their vestments in the sacristy ; the Bishop goes thither as before directed. They go out from the sacristy to the sanctuary, as directed, page 273. The Bishop is vested as prescribed at page 274. 8. The Bishop being vested, takes off the mitre, and rises ; the acolytes go before him with the book and the candlestick, and the Bishop, standing turned a little towards the candles, blesses them, singing in the ferial tone what is prescribed in the Missal for this purpose. When he begins the last prayer, the two acolytes go before him with the censer and incense-boat, and the holy-water vase. 9. After the prayers, the Bishop puts incense into the censer and blesses it; then having received the sprinkle from the assistant priest, he sprinkles the candles three times ; afterwards he incenses them also thrice, after which he sits, and puts on the mitre. Then the priest first in dignity, having been previously invited by the master of ceremonies, goes before the Bishop, makes a bow to him, and gives him the candle, which he kisses as well as the hand of the Bishop, who gives the candle to the master of ceremonies to be kept by one of the acolytes. 10. Then the apron, prepared for the purpose, is put on 328 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. the Bishop's knees. One of the acolytes brings the candles to be distributed, gives them, one by one, to the second assistant deacon, who presents them to the Bishop, who distributes them, first to the priest from whom he received the candle, then to the assistant priest, the assistant dea- cons, and all the clergy, who go to receive them, according to their order and rank; all receive them kneeling, and kiss, first the candle, then the Bishop's hand. In the meantime, the candles are distributed to the people by one or two priests ; and during the distribution the choir sings, Lumen ad revelationem. 11. After the distribution, the Bishop washes his hands. The antiphon, i^r^e, having been repeated, the Bishop takes off his mitre, rises and sings Or emus ; the first dea- con sings Flectamiis genua, and the second, Levate, only after Septuagesima, but not on Sunday, and the Bishop sings the prayer, Exaudi qucesumus, after which he sits, puts on the mitre, puts the incense into the censer and blesses it. 12. In the meantime, the candles are lighted, and every- thing is arranged for the procession around the church. The censer-bearer, with his censer, goes to the middle of the sanctuary, behind the sub-deacon, in his folded chasu- ble, carrying the cross, and having the acolytes, with their candlesticks and lighted candles, at his side. The first dea- con sings Procedamus in pace, the choir answers, In nomine Christi, Amen. Then the procession moves from the sanc- tuary in the following order : first, the censer- bearer, then the cross-bearer with the acolytes, afterwards the clergy, two by two, according to their order, all carrying their candles; lastly, the Bishop, between the assistant deacons, carrying the candle in his left hand, and blessing the people with his right. 13. During the procession, the priest who is to sing Mass, and the deacon and the sub-deacon, go to the sacristy, and put on their respective vestments, — white, if Mass is of the Blessed Virgin ; violet, if of the Sunday. Also the violet altar-veil is removed, if Mass is of the Blessed Virgin. 14. After the procession, the clergy take off their sacred vestments in the sacristy, and extinguish their candles. The Bishop goes to his seat, takes off the violet cope and ASH WEDNESDAY. 329 stole, and puts on the white, which an acolyte should bring thither in time. But if Mass is of the Sunday, the Bishop does not change his vestments. 15. Then the celebrant, preceded by the deacon and sub- deacon, goes to the altar, and Mass is celebrated as directed, page 277. 16. The clergy hold in their hands lighted candles, from the beginning to the end of the Gospel, and from the con- secration to the communion, except the Mass of Sunday be said. CHAPTER VI. ASH WEDNESDAY. Article I. Things to be Prepared. 1. On the side-table, besides everything necessary for High Mass, the following should be prepared : the holy- water vase, the ewer with the basin, a plate with some tow r els, another with slices of bread to cleanse the Bishop's hands, a towel to be placed on the Bishop's knees during the distribution of the ashes, a Missal for the Bishop, the candlestick, and a large stole for the deacon. 2. On the altar, the Bishop's vestments, viz., a violet cope and stole, pectoral cross, cincture, alb, amice, mitre, and crosier ; also a vase containing the ashes to be blessed, made of branches blessed on Palm Sunday the year preceding. 3. In the sacristy, the sacred vestments for the cele- brant, deacon, and sub-deacon (the two latter make use of folded chasubles), also two folded chasubles for the assist- ant deacons, a cope for the assistant priest, and a sufficient number of sacred vestments for the clergy, according to their order and dignity, the censer with the incense- boat, a chafing-dish, with fire and tongs. 28 330 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. Article II. From the entrance of the Bishop into the sacristy, to the end of the blessing and distribution of the ashes. 1. The Bishop goes to the sacristy, attended as before directed. The clergy put on their vestments in the sacristy ; they go out from the sacristy to the sanctuary, as directed, page 273, except that the celebrant, preceded by the dea- con and sub-deacon, walks immediately before the assistant priest! 2. On arriving at the sanctuary, the clergy go to their usual places, the celebrant, with the deacon and sub-deacon, to their bench, and the Bishop, with his assistants, to his seat, after having respectively made the usual genuflections and bows. The Bishop is vested as directed, page 274. 3. The sub-deacon, attended by the second master of ceremonies, goes up to the altar, and taking, with both hands, the vase containing the ashes, carries it, raised be- fore his face, to the throne, and holds it there, kneeling at the right of the Bishop, till the end of the blessing. 4. The acolytes, with the book and the candlestick, go before the Bishop, who, sitting with the mitre on, reads the antiphon, Exaudi nos; which being repeated after the Psalm by the choir, the Bishop rises, with his head un- covered, and sings, in the ferial tone, Dominus vobiscum, Oremus, and the four prayers as in the Missal. 5. After the prayers, the Bishop puts incense into the censer and blesses it, sprinkles and incenses the ashes three times. 6. Then he sits with his head uncovered ; the celebrant, accompanied by the master of ceremonies, goes to the Bishop, and having bowed to him, puts ashes on his head, saying, Memento homo, etc. 7. The Bishop puts on the mitre, the apron is placed on his knees, and he puts ashes on the head of the celebrant, who stands inclined before him ; to whom he says, Me- mento, etc. 8. Then the Bishop puts ashes on the heads of the ASH WEDNESDAY. 331 assistant priest, assistant deacons, officiating deacon, and all the clergy, who go for this purpose to receive them, according to their respective rank and order, kneeling whilst the ashes are put on. Last of all, he puts ashes on the people at the railing ; in doing which, he may be assisted by a priest, if the number of people is great. 9. Afterwards,' he returns to his seat and washes his hands as usual ; then rises, with his head uncovered, and sings, Dominus vobiscum, and the prayer as in the Missal, during which two acolytes remain before him, with their candlesticks and lighted candles. 10. After the prayer, the clergy go to take off the sacred vestments ; the Bishop keeps his on, and assisted and vested as before, does everything at Mass as directed, page 173, observing what follows. 11. At the collects, the Bishop kneels at the faldstool or praying desk, in the middle of the sanctuary, between his assistants. Again, he kneels in the same place, but with his mitre on, during the whole verse, Adjuva, sung by the choir. Also the celebrant, with his ministers, kneels before the altar during the same. 12. The deacon and sub-deacon observe what has been said before. 13. The preacher, after the Gospel has been sung, goes to ask the Bishop's blessing, and announces the Indul- gences. 14. The Bishop, having said the Sanctus, kneels as for the Collects, till the Per omnia scecula, before the Agnus Dei. So also all the clergy in the sanctuary. At the Post Communion, the Bishop kneels in the same manner; after the celebrant has sung the last Or emus, the deacon, turned towards the people, sings, Humiliate capita, etc. The rest is done as usual. What has been said in particular for this Mass, is to be observed in all ferial Masses during Advent and Lent* 332 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. CHAPTER VII. SUNDAYS IN LENT. 1. For the Sundays in Lent, everything is to be ob- served as directed for Sundays in Advent. 2. What has been said for the third Sunday in Advent, is to be observed also for the fourth Sunday in Lent. 3. Before the first Vespers of Passion Sunday, all the crosses and images on the altar and in the church are to be covered. CHAPTER VIII. PALM SUNDAY. Article I. • Things to be Prepared. 1. On the altar, the Bishop's vestments, as directed, page 270. 2. On the side-table, everything as there directed ; also the large stole for the deacon. 3. By the side-table, as there stated. The processional cross is to be covered with a violet veil. 4. Between the Bishop's seat and the altar, a table covered all over with a white linen cloth, and on it the palms to be blessed, and that of the Bishop adorned with flowers. 5. In the sanctuary, on the Gospel side, three stands for the deacons who are to sing the Passion. 6. In the sacristy, the sacred vestments for the celebrant, deacon, and sub-deacon, as directed in chap. vi. Also PALM SUNDAY. 333 three violet stoles and maniples, with three cinctures, albs, amices, and books, for the three deacons who are to sing the Passion. Article II. From the entrance of the Bishop and Clergy into the Church to the beginning of Mass, 1. The Bishop goes to the sacristy, attended as directed, page 273. 2. The clergy put on their vestments in the sacristy. 3. All go out from the sacristy to the sanctuary. 4. The Bishop puts on the sacred vestments. All is done as directed, page 274. 5. The Bishop being vested, the choir sings Hosanna, which the Bishop reads in the meantime, and then sings, in a ferial tone, Dominus vobiscum, and the prayer as in the Missal. The sub-deacon sings the Epistle with the usual ceremonies, and the Bishop reads it as well as the Gradual, Munda cor meum, and the Gospel. The deacon sings the Gospel with the usual ceremonies. After the Gospel, the sub-deacon carries the book to the Bishop, who kisses it, and is afterwards incensed by the assistant priest. 6. Then the Bishop sings Dominus vobiscum, and the prayer, Auge, as in the Missal, and after it the Preface ; which being ended, the choir sings, and the Bishop says the Sanctus. Afterwards the Bishop sings the five prayers, as in the Missal. Whilst he is singing the last prayer, two acolytes go before him with the censer and incense- boat, and with the holy-water vase and sprinkle. The last prayer being ended, the Bishop puts incense into the censer, blesses it, sprinkles thrice the palms, saying, Asperges me, without the Psalm, and incenses them thrice. Then he sings Dominus vobiscum, and the prayer, Deus, qui Filium tuum; and having finished it, he sits down, and puts on the mitre. 7. The first in dignity amongst those who are presen. on' invitation from the master of ceremonies, goes to the Bishop, and gives him the palm, kissing it and the Bishop's 334 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. hand. The apron, prepared for this purpose, is then put on the Bishop's knees, and one of the acolytes furnishing, one by one, the palms to the second assistant deacon, the deacon gives them to the Bishop, who distributes them, first to the priest from whom he received it, then to the assistant priest and assistant deacon, to the deacon and sub- deacon, and all the -clergy, who go to receive them, two by two, and kiss both the palm and the Bishop's hand, making the usual reverences. The choir, during the distribution, sings, Pueri Hebrceorum. 8. After the distribution, the Bishop washes his hands. Then two acolytes, with their candlesticks and lighted candles, go before the Bishop, who, standing with his head uncovered, sings Dominus vobiscum,, and the prayer, Om- nipotens sempiterne JDeus; at the end of which he sits down, puts on the mitre, and puts incense into the censer, as usual. In the meanwhile, everything is prepared for the proces- sion. The first assistant deacon sings, Procedamus in pace. They all carry the palms in their hands. The Bishop, be- tween the assistant deacons, holds the palm in his left, and blesses the people with his right. The officiating deacon walks at the left of the assistant priest. The choir sings the antiphons as in the Missal. 9. The procession moves out of the church ; there they divide and place themselves as directed, page 220 ; two or four of the singers remain within the church ; the doors are shut, the Gloria, laus, is sung, and after it, when the sub-deacon knocks at the door with the foot of the cross, it is opened, the procession enters the church, the choir singing Ingrediente Domino. 10. The procession having returned to the sanctuary, the Bishop goes to his seat, and remains for Mass in his sacred vestments ; but the others take them off. The celebrant comes from the sacristy to the sanctuary, and Mass is cele- brated, as directed in page 222 and page 324. 11. "What follows, is particularly to be observed at Mass. 12. When the sub-deacon, at the Epistle, sings the words, Ut in nomine Jesu omne genuflectatur, the Bishop and all the clergy kneel till after the words, Et infernorum. PALM SUNDAY. 335 13. Whilst the Epistle and Tract are sung, three deacons go to the sacristy, put on amices, albs, cinctures, maniples, and stoles, and at the end of the Tract, preceded by the master of ceremonies, go to the sanctuary in the following order, carrying the Book before their breast. First the deacon, who sings the words of the Evangelist ; second, he who sings the words of the crowd ; third, he who sings the words of Christ. They are followed by three acolytes, without candlesticks, and without the censer; after having made the usual genuflection and bows, they go to kiss the Bishop's hand, without asking the blessing. They go to the place where the Passion is to be sung, and place them- selves as directed, page 223, the acolytes holding the books. 14. When they begin to sing the Passion, the Bishop and all the clergy rise, with their heads uncovered, and stand w T ith the palms in their hands till the end of it. The cele- brant reads it at the Epistle side, and when he has done reading, he turns towards the deacons of the Passion, and stands at the corner of the altar, the deacon also on the middle step, and the sub-deacon before the lowest step, with palms in their hands ; at the words Emisit spiritum, the Bishop and all the clergy kneel at their places. 15. After the Passion, the Bishop sits, says Munda cor meum, and reads the Gospel ; the deacon takes off his folded chasuble, puts on the large stole, carries the book to the altar, kisses the Bishop's hand, goes to the altar, kneels, and says Munda cor meum ; at the same time, the Bishop puts incense into the censer as usual ; then the deacon and sub-deacon, with the censer-bearer, and two acolytes, with- out candlesticks, go to the Bishop's seat, the deacon asks his blessing, the Gospel is sung as usual, and the Bishop, having kissed the book, is incensed by the assistant priest. 16. At the elevation, the Bishop alone holds the palm in his hand. The rest is done as in other Masses. 336 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. CHAPTER IX. MATINS OF THE TENEBRJ3. 1. For these Matins, everything is to be prepared as directed, page 225, and when the Bishop officiates at them, everything is done as there specified. 2. If the Bishop occupies his usual seat, he has no other assistant than the master of ceremonies, who sits in some place near ; but it is advisable that the Bishop should sit in a choir-stall with the other clergymen. 3. The Bishop rises with the clergy, and kneels and re- cites the prayer, Respice. 4. On Maundy Thursday, and on Good-Friday, for the Tenebrse, the altar, the Bishop's throne, and faldstool should be quite bare. CHAPTER X. MAUNDY THURSDAY. Article I. Things to be Prepared. 1. A chapel for the repository. 2. The high altar, as on the greatest festivities, with white altar veil, etc. 3. On the altar, the Bishop's vestments, with the excep- tion of the cope. A chalice, with a purifier, for cleansing the Bishop's fingers. 4. On the side-table, besides everything necessary for the Pontifical Mass, two particles on the paten, one of which should be of a size to fit the chalice in which it is to be placed ; a second chalice, with its paten, pall, veil, and a MAUNDY THURSDAY. 337 white ribbon to fasten the veil round the chalice; a pyx, with a sufficient number of small particles, for the commu- nion of the clergy and people ; a long linen cloth for the communion of the clergy. By the side-table, the processional cross. 5. In a convenient place, in or near the sanctuary, the canopy for the procession. 6. In the sanctuary, in the middle towards the railing, a table covered with fine linen cloth, two candlesticks and candles, and the Pontifical on a cushion or stand on it, on that side which corresponds to the Gospel side. Behind the table, a chair for the Bishop, with three stools for the assistant deacons on each side, and for the assistant priest on the Gospel side. On each side of the table, six seats, or a bench sufficient for six persons, covered with suitable cloth. Behind the Bishop's chair, placed near the table, seats for the seven deacons and seven sub-deacons, who as- sist at the consecration of the oils. 7. In the sacristy, besides the usual white vestments for the assistant priest and deacons, and for the officiating dea- con and sub-deacon, twelve white chasubles, stoles, and man- iples, with as many cinctures, albs, and amices, for twelve priests ; also seven white dalmatics, stoles, and maniples, with as many cinctures, albs, and amices, for seven deacons, and seven white tunics and maniples, with seven cinctures, albs, and amices, for seven sub-deacons, who are all to assist at the consecration of the oils ; besides, a sufficient number of sacred vestments for the other clergy, according to their order and rank, if there be any more. Moreover, two censers and incense-boat, and a wooden clapper. Can- dles in sufficient number for the procession. 8. In a suitable place, either in the sacristy, or near the baptismal font, three metal vases, large enough to contain a sufficient quantity of oil for all the churches of the diocese. On one of them there should be engraven at least the initials of these words, Oleum Infirmorum, on another, Oleum Catechumenorum, and on the third, Sanctum Chrisma. The first and second should be covered with silk cloth of any color, the third with white silk cloth. Near them, should be prepared tw T o long veils for the deacons, who are 29 338 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. to carry the vases containing the oil of catechumens and the chrism. Also near the vase, a plate, and in it a small vessel containing the palm, and a spatula to mix it. 9. For the washing of the feet, should be prepared the necessary vessels to hold the water, which should be a little warm ; and basins for washing the feet ; also, a sufficient number of towels to wipe them ; the ewer, basin, and towels for the Bishop to wash and wipe his hands ; also a large towel with strings, which the Bishop puts before him, when he washes the feet ; two benches, capable of contain- ing six persons each, higher than usual, before which there should be a step ; the book of the Gospel, a violet stole, and cope, for the Bishop ; and white dalmatic, tunic, stole, and maniples, for the deacon and sub-deacon ; the candle- sticks, with lighted candles, for the acolytes, and the censer and incense-boat. Article II. From the entrance of the Bishop and Clergy into the sanc- tuary, to the beginning of Mass. 1. The Bishop goes to the sacristy as before directed. 2. As soon as the Bishop and clergy arrive at the sacristy, they go into the sanctuary before they put on the sacred vestments. After a short prayer, they all rise, and say None, which is not to be sung. The Bishop, at the same time,. reads the Psalms for the preparation of Mass, without Gloria Patri, and they put on him the stockings and sandals. The Psalms of None being ended, the Bishop goes to the middle, kneels before the faldstool, and all the clergy kneel at their places, during Christus, Pater, and Miserere, etc. ; at the end of which the Bishop says the prayer Respice. 3. The prayer Respice being ended, the clergy who have to put on the sacred vestments, go for this purpose to the sacristy. The Bishop goes to his seat ; the deacon and sub- deacon, who should take their sacred vestments during None, go to the Bishop's side, and help to take oflP his cape, wash his hands, and put on the sacred vestments as before directed. MAUNDY THURSDAY. 339 Article III. From the beginning to the end of Mass. 1. As soon as the clergy have put on their vestments, they go to their places in the sanctuary, and the Bishop being vested, the deacon and sub-deacon put on their mani- ples, the assistant deacons go to the side of the Bishop, and Mass is celebrated as usual, with the following exceptions. 2. At the Confession the Psalm, Judica, is omitted. The organ is not played, nor the bells rung any more after the Gloria in excelsis; instead of bells a wooden clapper is used. 3. Before the Bishop says the words, Per quern haw omnia, Domine, semper bona creas, having made a genuflec- tion to the Blessed Sacrament, he retires to the Epistle side, near the altar, where he washes his fingers in another chalice, and wipes them, makes again a genuflection to the Blessed Sacrament, goes to the first step of the altar, puts on the mitre, takes the crosier in his hand, and between the two assistant deacons, preceded by the assistant priest, goes to the seat near the table, prepared as in Art. I, n. 6, of this chapter, sits, turned towards the altar, having the table before him, and his assistants at his side, all the others remaining at their places ; then the assistant priest says, with a loud voice, in the tone of a Lesson, Oleum infirmorum. Immediately after, one of the seven sub- deacons, having at his side two acolytes, goes to the sacristy, takes the vessel with the oil to be consecrated for the sick, covered as it is, and holding its foot in his right hand, and having his left arm round it, carries it to the Bishop, and gives it into the hands of the assistant priest, saying, Oleum infirmorum. The assistant priest presents it to the Bishop, saying the same words, and puts it on the table. 4. The Bishop, with his mitre on, rises, and reads the exorcisms in a 1ow t voice, loud enough, however, to be heard by the priests who are round him ; after the ex- orcisms, the clergy answer, Amen; the Bishop, having taken off his mitre, says Dominus vobiscum, and reads also, in a 340 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. low voice, the prayer, Phnitte, qucesumus; after which, the vessel is brought back to the sacristy by the sub-deacon, accompanied by two acolytes. The Bishop puts on the mitre, seats himself, and washes his hands ; then, rising with his mitre on, returns to the altar attended by his ministers, and on arriving before the lowest step, takes off his mitre, makes a genuflection, goes up to the altar, and continues Mass from the words, Per quern hwc omnia, etc., as far as the communion of the Sacred Body and Blood inclusively. 5. The Bishop having communicated, places the con- secrated Host to be reserved for the following" day in the chalice prepared for the purpose, which the master of ceremonies should have previously carried to the altar, with its veil and ribbon ; the deacon covers it with the pall and the paten ; over them he places the veil, which he fastens with the ribbon round the foot of the chalice, and places in the middle of the altar. 6. Then the deacon sings the Confiteor, and the celebrant gives the communion, first to the deacon and sub-deacon, and afterwards to the rest of the clergy, according to their rank, beginning with the priests, who should wear the stole. To-dav, the Pax is not given to the deacon and sub-deacon J 7 © by the Bishop before the communion. 7. The communion being ended, the Bishop having taken not only the usual ablutions, but also that which had been previously left in the other chalice, makes a genu- flection to the Blessed Sacrament, goes down to the second step, puts on the mitre, takes the crosier, and attended by the ministers as before, goes to the seat near the table. 8. The Bishop having seated himself, the assistant priest, standing near him, says in a loud voice, and in the tone of a lesson, Oleum ad Sanctum Chrisma, and immediately after, Oleum Catechumenorum ; then the Bishop puts incense into the censer and blesses it. This being done, they go to the sacristy for the oils in the following order: the censer- bearer, the two acolytes with their candlesticks and lighted candles, the seven sub-deacons, two by two, and in the third row three ; the seven deacons likewise ; and, lastly, MAUNDY THUKSDAY. 341 the twelve priests, also two by two. The Bishop, and his assistants and ministers, remain at their places. 9. The procession comes out of the sacristy in the fol- lowing order : the censer-bearer, the sub-deacon with the processional cross, between the acolytes with their candle- sticks, two chanters singing the verses, Redemptor ; six sub-deacons, two by two • five deacons, in the first row two, in the second three ; a sub-deacon, carrying the vase with the balm, two deacons carrying the vases with oil, having a long veil hanging from their neck before their breast, holding the vases with their left arms round them, and covering the lower part of the vases with that part of the veils which hangs on their right ; the deacon carrying the oil for the chrism, walks at the right, and he that carries the oil of catechumens at the left ; last of all, the twelve priests, two by two. As they move from the sacristy, the chanters begin to sing the verses, O Redemptor, etc., which are immediately repeated by the choir ; as also after each strophe sung by the chanters. 10. When the procession arrives at the sanctuary, the censer-bearer and the sub-deacon with the cross, between the acolytes, place themselves near the altar at the Epistle side ; the twelve priests, six on each side of the assistant deacons, with their faces turned towards the altar, the dea- cons behind the Bishop, and the sub-deacons behind the deacons. The sub-deacon with the balm, and the deacons with the oil, stop until the others have taken their places. Which being done, the deacon with the oil for the chrism goes before the Bishop, and the assistant priest, receiving from him the vase wrapped in the veil, which the deacon had round his neck, presents it to the Bishop, and lays it on the table before him. In the meanwhile, the other deacon holds the vessel of the oil of the catechumens on his arm. Then the sub-deacon with the balm gives the vase which contains it to the assistant priest, who, having presented it to the Bishop, lays it on the table. The Bishop takes off his mitre, rises, and turned towards the altar, blesses the balm, saying, Dominus vobiscum, and the two prayers, as found in the Roman Pontifical. The second prayer being ended, the Bishop, still standing, puts on the 342 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. mitre, and mixes in a paten, or in another vessel, the balm with some oil, which is taken from the vase, saying the third prayer. 11. After the third prayer, the clergy having answered, Amen, the Bishop sits with his mitre on, breathes thrice in the form of a cross over the mouth of the vase, which is yet kept wrapped in the veil. Then the twelve priests breathe over it in the same manner as the Bishop, one after another, making genuflections to the Blessed Sacra- ment on the altar, and bowing to the Bishop both before and after. Which being done, the Bishop rises, and, with his mitre on, reads the exorcism ; at the end of which, he takes off his mitre, and with his hands extended before his breast, he sings the Preface as in the Pontifical, and having concluded it with the words, Per eumdem Dominum, etc., which he reads, the clergy answer, Amen. 12. Then the Bishop puts into the vase for the chrism, the mixture of balm and oil, saying, Hcee commixtio, etc., and the deacon, who carried the vase of the chrism, removes from it the long veil in which it was wrapped. Then the Bishop bowing, sings, Ave, Sanctum Chrisma, three times, but the second time he raises his voice a tone higher, and the third he raises it another tone higher. After the third time, he kisses the border of the vessel, sits down, and puts on his mitre. 13. The twelve priests, one after the other, make a genu- flection to the Blessed Sacrament and a reverence to the Bishop, kneel on both knees, in the middle, at a distance from the table, and sing, Ave, Sanctum Chrisma, then rise, go nearer the table, kneel again, sing, Ave, Sanctum Chrisma, a tone higher ; rise, approach the table, kneel, sing Ave, Sanctum Chrisma, another tone higher; then rise and kiss the border of the vase. They then return to their places, having made a genuflection to the Blessed Sacra- ment on the altar, and a bow to the Bishop. This being done by the twelve priests, the vase with the chrism is placed on one side of the table. 14. The deacon who holds the vase of the oil of cate- chumens goes before the Bishop, and gives it (without the veil, which he retains) to the assistant priest, who, having MAUNDY THURSDAY. 343 shown it to the Bishop, places it on the middle of the table before the Bishop, who immediately after breathes over it thrice in the form of a cross. The twelve priests, one after the other, do in like manner. Then the Bishop rises, with his mitre on, and reads in a low voice, the exorcisms ; at the end of which, the clergy answer, Amen. The Bishop takes off his mitre, and standing, says in a low voice Dominus vobiscum, etc., Or emus, and the prayer, Deus, in- crementorum, for the blessing of the oil of catechumens, which being ended, the clergy answer, Amen. Afterwards, the Bishop sings thrice, Ave Sanctum Oleum, as has been said, n. 12, for the chrism, and kisses the brim of the vase; the same is done likewise by the twelve priests, as directed in n. 13. 15. All this being done, the deacons take the vases in their arms, and the procession is arranged, as in n. 9, to bring back to the sacristy the consecrated oil and the chrism, the chanters singing the verses, TJt novetur, and the choir repeating after each strophe, Redemptor. 16. Whilst they go to the sacristy, the Bishop, sitting, washes his hands, returns to the altar, and continues Mass as usual ; but every time he goes to or from the middle of the altar, he makes a genuflection to the Blessed Sacra- ment, and when he says Dominus vobiscum, does not turn his back to the Blessed Sacrament, but draws back a little towards the Gospel side. After the Ite, Missa est, the Bishop standing, without mitre, on the Gospel side, with- out turning completely round, gives the solemn blessing. But the Indulgences are to be published in the chapel of the repository. 17. The Bishop, at the words In principio erat Verbum, should not make the sign of the cross, as usual, on the altar , v but only on himself. Article IV. The Procession to the Repository. 1. After the Gospel of St. John, he goes to his seat, takes off the sacred vestments as far as the stole exclusively, and puts on a white cope. In the same time, another sub- 344 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. deacon in tunic, takes the processional cross, covered with a violet veil, and the acolytes their candlesticks: candles are distributed to the clergy, and lighted ; the canopy is brought outside of the railing, and given to those who are to carry it. 2. The Bishop, at his seat, with his mitre on, puts in- cense into the two censers, but he does not bless it, neither does the assistant priest kiss the spoon, nor the Bishop's hand. Then the Bishop, with his assistants, goes to the altar, takes off his mitre, and kneeling on a cushion on the lowest step of the altar, he incenses thrice the Blessed Sacrament ; the long veil is put on his shoulders, and fast- ened before his breast. The first assistant deacon goes up to the altar, and after the usual genuflections, takes the Blessed Sacrament, and, standing, presents it to the Bishop, kneeling down on the highest step ; who, having received it, rises, and the deacon makes a genuflection, and the choir begins to sing Pange Lingua. The assistant deacons, on each side of the Bishop, raise the extremities of his cope, and the master of ceremonies raises up his vestments in front, when he goes up or down the steps. The procession walks to the repository in the following order : the sub- deacon between the acolytes with their candlesticks, the chanters, the inferior clergy, the acolyte carrying the crosier, the sub-deacons, the deacons, the priests in chasu- bles, the deacon and sub-deacon, the assistant priest, the two censer-bearers, moving slowly and regularly .their censers ; the Bishop, between the two assistant deacons, under the canopy, followed by the acolytes, with the mitre, book, candle, etc. 3. The cross-bearer and the acolytes, on arriving near the door of the chapel, retire a little on one side to make way for the procession, and remain there standing and turned towards the procession. Those of the clergy who walk next to the cross-bearer stop, the first on each side of the chapel, and those who follow stop next to them, so that the clergymen who walked the last may be the nearest to the altar of the repository, and divide into two lines, and the Bishop, with the assistant ministers, passes between them. The censer-bearers, on entering the chapel, keep MAUNDY THURSDAY. 345 their censers motionless. Those who carry the canopy, stop at the door of the chapel. 4. The Bishop, on arriving at the highest step of the altar, stops, and the deacon kneeling down, receives from him the Blessed Sacrament, and immediately places it in the urn, or tabernacle, prepared for the purpose, leaving the door opened. Then the Bishop goes down to the second step, puts incense into the censer, kneels down, and incenses thrice the Blessed Sacrament. The deacon shuts the door of the urn, and the Bishop goes up to the altar, makes a genuflection, kisses the altar, takes in his left hand the crosier, and standing at the Gospel side, without mitre, gives the solemn blessing ; after which, the assistant priest publishes- as usual the forty-days' Indulgences. 5. The procession returns to the sanctuary in the same order as it came ; the Bishop, on arriving at his seat, takes oif the sacred vestments. The clergy likewise take theirs off in the sacristy. Then Vespers are recited, and the altars stripped. Article V. The Mandatum, or Washing of the Feet. 1. At a convenient hour, the Bishop and clergy meet in the place prepared for the washing of the feet. The Bishop puts on the amice, alb, cincture, with a violet stole and cope, and plain mitre. The deacon and sub-deacon, with the assistant priest, put on white vestments as for Mass. 2. Thirteen poor men, or thirteen clergymen, sit on high benches, with a high step in front ; the covering of their right feet should be so arranged as to make it easy to remove it, when they are to be washed. 3. The Bishop, attended as usual by his assistants, at his seat or faldstool, puts incense into the censer and blesses it. Then the deacon holding the Missal before his breast, with the sub-deacon, the two acolytes carrying their candle- sticks, go before the Bishop, kneel down, and the deacon asks the blessing, saying, Jube Domne, etc., which the Bishop gives him as usual, saying, Dominus sit, etc. The 346 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. Gospel is afterwards sung with the usual ceremonies ; the book is carried to the Bishop by the sub-deacon, and the Bishop is incensed by the deacon. 4. After the Gospel, the choir sings Mandatum novum, and what follows as in the Missal ; the Bishop takes off his cope, receives the gremiale, and with his mitre on, goes before the first poor man, or clergyman, kneels on a cushion, which for this purpose is moved by an acolyte, as he passes on, and the ewer and basin being brought by the attending clergymen, the Bishop washes the right foot, wipes it with a towel, and kisses it; and if a poor man, he gives him some alms. He does in like manner to the other twelve. 5. After having washed his feet, the Bishop returns to his seat, washes his hands, takes off the gremiale which he had tied on him, puts on the cope, and takes off his mitre. The two acolytes with their candlesticks, and a third one with the book, and a fourth with the candlestick, go before him, and rising, he says, Pater Noster, etc., Et ne nos, etc., with the following verses and prayers as in the Missal. After which, the Bishop, raising his hands, makes the sign of the cross towards those who are present. Lastly, he takes off the sacred vestments, and retires. CHAPTER XL GOOD FRIDAY. Article I. What is to be Prepared. 1. The altar, the seat intended for the Bishop, the sacred ministers' bench, and all the sanctuary, should be quite bare, without any ornaments. 2. On the altar, the cross, covered with a black veil, but in such a manner as to render it easy to uncover its differ- GOOD FRIDAY. 347 ent parts successively ; six plain candlesticks, with un- bleached wax candles; the Bishop's vestments, viz., an amice, alb, and cincture, with a black maniple, stole, dal- matic, tunic, and chasuble, the pectoral cross, and the plain white mitre. The sandals, gloves, and crosier are not used on this day. 3. On the small table should be spread a linen cloth, which ought not, however, to hang down ; and on this table should be placed the ewer and basin, with a towel on a plate ; the cruets, a book-stand with a Missal, another Missal, an altar-cloth folded, a large black stole for the deacon, a black burse with a purifier and a corporal, a black veil for the chalice, two candlesticks, with unbleached wax candles, for the acolytes. 4. In the sacristy, the sacred vestments for the deacon and sub-deacon, viz., two amices, albs, and cinctures, and a stole ; a black cope for the assistant priest ; also two folded chasubles of the same color, with cinctures, albs, and amices, for the two assistant deacons. Likewise, a sufficient number of sacred vestments for the clergy. Also, three amices, albs, cinctures, with as many black maniples and stoles, and three Missals, for the deacons who have to sing the Passion. Two censers with incense-boats, a chafing- dish with fire and tongs, the tapers and candles for the procession. 5. At the Gospel side in the sanctuary, a violet carpet, with a long white veil, and a violet velvet cushion, adorned with gold-lace and embroidery, for the veneration of the cross. Also, three bare book-stands or desks, for those, who are to sing the Passion. 6. Before the middle of the altar, and at the foot of the lowest step, the praying-desk bare, and five cushions, to be placed on the highest step of the altar, for the prostration of the Bishop's assistants and ministers, three on the Epistle side, and two on the Gospel side. • 7. In any convenient place, the processional cross, covered with a violet veil, and the wooden clapper. 8. At the chapel of the repository, besides the canopy, the white veil on the side- table, and the key of the taber- 348 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. nacle on the altar ; also near it, the steps (if necessary) to reach the door of the tabernacle. 9. On the ministers' bench, the folded chasubles, and maniples for the deacon and sub-deacon. Article II. From the entrance of the Bishop and clergy into the sanc- tuary, to the beginning of the Office. 1. The Bishop goes to the sacristy as directed in the first part of this book. 2. From the sacristy, the clergy, before they put on the sacred vestments, go with the Bishop to the sanctuary : only the deacon and sub-deacon remain in the sacristy, and put on the sacred vestments, the folded chasubles and maniples excepted. The Bishop and clergy having entered the sanctuary, kneel, pray for a short space of time, and rise. The Bishop goes to his seat ; they all say Pater and Ave, in a low voice, and when the Psalm Mirabilia is begun, they sit down, and continue None. At the end of this canonical hour, the Bishop goes to the praying-desk, and, with the clergy, kneels during the Christus and Miserere; the Bishop says the prayer Respice, at the end of which they all rise ; the Bishop goes to his seat ; the deacon and sub-deacon come from the sacristy, go to his side and assist him to put on his vestments. At the same time, the clergy put on their sacred vest- ments in the sacristy. The two assistant deacons go to the side of the Bishop, and the deacon and sub-deacon go to their bench, and put on their maniples and folded chasubles. Article III. From the beginning of the Office to the end of it. 1. The Bishop, being vested, goes to the middle, and taking off his mitre, kneels before the praying-desk ; at the same time the assistant priest and deacons, with the offi- GOOD FRIDAY. 349 dating deacon and sub-deacon, prostrate themselves on the cushions, which the acolytes place on the steps as directed above. All the clergy kneel, and remain praying for some time. Meanwhile, two acolytes unfold the altar-cloth. 2. The Bishop and ministers rise, go up to the altar, and kiss it. An acolyte places the faldstool on the platform, at the Epistle side, and the Bishop sits on it, turned towards the Gospel side (for to-day he does not go to his seat, before the end of the office) ; the assistant priest sits on the first step, at the feet of the Bishop, and behind him, on the same step, the deacon and sub-deacon ; and near these, the two assistant deacons. The clergy si't at their usual places. 3. One of the acolytes, attended by the master of cere- monies, having made the usual genuflection and reverences, goes to the place where the Epistle is usually sung, and there sings the Lesson in the tone of a Prophecy. He does not kiss the Bishop's hand ; but, leaving the book in the hand of the master of ceremonies, makes the usual genu- flection and reverences, and returns to his place. Whilst the Tract is sung by the choir, the Bishop, still sitting, reads the Lesson and the Tract from the book, which an acolyte holds before him ; but he is not accompanied by the other, nor do the acolytes carry the candlesticks on this day. The Bishop's assistants and ministers stand by him whilst he reads. 4. After the Tract, the Bishop takes off his mitre, rises, and turning towards the altar, sings Or emus. The deacon sings Flcctamus genua ; and the sub-deacon, Levate ; stand- ing, one after the other, behind the Bishop. At the words, Flectamus, etc., all, except the Bishop, kneel, and at the word Levate they rise. Then the Bishop sings the prayer ; during which the sub-deacon takes off his folded chasuble, and at the end of the prayer sings the second Lesson in the tone of the Epistle, during which the Bishop, with his assistants and the clergy, sit as before. After the Epistle, the sub-deacon does not kiss the Bishop's hand ; but he resumes his chasuble, and returns to his place. The Bishop sits, and whilst the choir sings the Tract, he reads the Epistle and the Tract, attended as usual. 350 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 5. Whilst the Tract is sung, the three deacons, who are to sing the Passion, go to the sacristy, put on the sacred vestments, and towards the end of the Tract go out to the sanctuary, and sing the Passion. Everything is done as at page 335, except that they do not kiss the Bishop's hand. The Bishop, attended by his assistants, reads the Passion out of the Missal placed on the altar at the Epistle side, and makes a genuflection there at the words Et inclinato capite. 6. After the Passion, the Bishop and the clergy seat themselves ; the officiating deacon takes off his chasuble, puts on the large stole, carries the book to the altar, kneels, says, Munda cor meum, takes the book, and without asking the blessing, goes with the sub-deacon, and the acolytes without candlesticks, and without the censer, to sing the last part of the Passion, in the tone of the Gospel ; which being done, they all return to their places. 7. If there is a sermon, the preacher, accompanied by the master of ceremonies, goes to the Bishop, and asks the Indulgences, without, however, asking the blessing ; and having made the usual genuflection, and reverences, goes to the pulpit and preaches. The Bishop sits at the Epistle side, but turned towards the preacher. All the clergy sit during the sermon. After the sermon, the preacher pub- lishes the Indulgences. Then the Bishop immediately takes off the mitre, and rises ; the chair is removed, and the prayers are sung as in the Missal ; the Bishop singing Oremus, the deacon Flectamus genua, and the sub-deacon, Levate. Whilst the last prayers are sung, the acolytes spread the carpet on the steps of the altar, and put the cushion on the lower steps, and over it the veil on which the cross is to be laid. 8. After all the prayers, the Bishop takes off his chasuble, and goes to the back corner of the altar, at the Epistle side, and turns towards the people. The sacristan, taking the cross from the altar, gives it to the deacon, and the deacon to the Bishop, who, having received it respectfully, with his right hand uncovers the top as far as the cross-piece, and raising it with both hands, sings, Ecce lignum Cruris, out of the book which the assistant priest holds before GOOD FRIDAY. 351 him; the deacon being at the Bishop's right and the sub-deacon at the left. All rise with their heads uncov- ered ; the Bishop, assisted by the ministers, continues to sing, In quo salus mundi pependit; and the choir and all the clergy, the Bishop only excepted, kneeling on both knees, and bowing their heads, answer, Venite, adoremus; after which, the Bishop, with the assistant priest and min- isters, goes up to the platform, and stops at the Epistle side, where he uncovers the right arm and head of the crucifix, and raising his voice one tone higher, sings again, Ecce lignum Cruris; and everything is done as before. Afterwards he goes to the middle of the altar with all his assistants ; there he uncovers the whole cross, giving the veil to the sub-deacon, by whom it is given to an acolyte, who carries it to the small table; and the Bishop then sings, one tone still higher than the second time, Ecce lignum Cruris; and everything is done the third time as before. The Bishop goes alone to the place prepared for the cross, carrying it raised up with both hands, and lays it on the cushion. He then goes to the chair, takes off his shoes, and without mitre, goes between the two assistant deacons to venerate the cross, kneeling the first time near the com- munion rail, and praying a little ; the second time, at half the distance from it to the place where the cross is ; and the third time, close to the cross, which he reverently kisses, after having prayed, and returns to the chair, where he puts on his shoes, chasuble, and mitre. He afterwards sits and reads, Popule metis, etc. 9. After the Bishop, the assistant priest, the two assistant deacons, the deacon and sub-deacon, and all the clergy, according to their respective order and dignity, go to ven- erate the cross, in the same manner as the Bishop. During the veneration of the cross, the choir sings, Improperia ; and about the end of it the candles are lighted. The dea- con and sub-deacon unfold the linen cloth, which had been extended by the acolytes on the altar. The deacon carries from the small table to the altar the corporal and the purifier, and having taken the corporal out of the burse, unfolds it in the middle of the altar ; the master of cere- monies carries the book-stand and the Missal to the altar, 352 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. and places it at the Gospel side. The veneration being ended, the deacon carries back the cross to the altar, with- out making any reverence, and all the clergy kneel as he passes. The Bishop sits down and washes his hands. 10. Then the procession is arranged in the following order : the two censer-bearers with their censers and incense- boat ; the cross-bearer in sub-deacon's vestments, between the two acolytes with their candlesticks ; the clergy ; the assistant priest between the deacon and sub-deacon, and the Bishop between the two assistant deacons. As they move from the middle of the altar, they all make a genu- flection to the cross. 11. When the procession arrives at the repository, all place themselves as yesterday ; the Bishop, on arriving at the door or entry of the chapel, takes off his mitre ; on coming to the altar, he kneels, with all the clergy ; and, having prayed for some time, the Bishop rises ; the assist- ant priest presents to him the incense-boat. The Bishop puts incense into the censer ; but does not bless the incense ; the sacristan, if in Holy Orders, opens the tabernacle, and the Bishop having knelt down, incenses the Blessed Sacra- ment thrice ; the long veil is put on the Bishop's shoulders, and the first assistant deacon takes the Blessed Sacrament from the tabernacle, and gives it to the Bishop, who is yet kneeling. The deacon makes a genuflection, and the Bishop, having covered the chalice with the veil hanging from his shoulders, holds it with both hands, rises, and all go in procession, as yesterday, to the altar ; at the same time the choir sings, Vexilla Regis, etc. Those, who carry the canopy, stop at the chancel, the others form a double semicircle before the altar, and kneel down till after communion, holding the lighted candles in their hands. 12. The Bishop, on arriving at the steps of the altar, standing, gives the Blessed Sacrament to the officiating deacon, who receives it kneeling, and places it on the altar. The Bishop, having taken off the veil, kneels on a cushion, on the lowest step. Pie afterwards rises, and being attended by the assistant priest, puts incense into the censer without blessing it. He incenses the Blessed Sacrament thrice, goes up to the altar, takes the Blessed Sacrament out of the GOOD FRIDAY. 353 chalice, and taking care not to touch it, places it on the paten which is held by the officiating deacon ; and having received the paten from the hands of the same, lays the Sacred Host on the corporal, without saying anything. If he happen to touch the Blessed Sacrament, he washes his fingers in some vessel prepared for this purpose; the dea- con puts wine into the chalice, and the sub-deacon water, which is not blessed by the Bishop, who does not say the usual prayer; but having received it from the deacon, places it on the altar, and the deacon covers it with the pall. 13. The Bishop, having received the incense-boat from the assistant priest, puts incense into the censer, without blessing it, and incenses first the sacred offerings, saying, Incensum istud ; secondly, the cross, and thirdly, the altar, saying, Dirigatur, Domine, etc., making a genuflection before and after, and every time he passes before the Blessed Sacrament ; and having incensed the altar, he gives the censer to the deacon, saying, Accendat in nobis, Domine, etc. The Bishop is not incensed. 14. After the incensing, the Bishop retires a little towards the Epistle side of the altar, and washes his hands, without saying anything ; then he goes to the middle of the altar, bows, and joins his hands, saying, In spiritu humilitatis; afterwards receding a little towards the Gospel side, he turns towards the people, and says, Orate, fr aires, taking care not to make a complete circle, turning his face towards the people, and back again, towards the altar. He imme- diately sings in a ferial tone, Oremus, Prceceptis salutaribus moniti, etc., and having said in a low voice, Amen, says the prayer, Libera nos, etc., in the same tone of voice in* which he said the Pater. Having finished it, he makes a genu- flection, puts the paten under the Blessed Sacrament, and taking the latter in his right hand, raises it so that it may be seen by the people ; then he divides the Sacred Host in three parts as usual, and puts the smallest of them into the chalice, without' making the sign of the cross. He does not say Pax Domini, nor Agnus Dei; neither does he give the Pax. 15. The Bishop, having put the particle into the chalice, 30 354 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. makes a genuflection, and having said only, Perceptio cor- poris, makes again a genuflection, takes the paten with the Blessed Sacrament, says, Partem coelestem accipiam, etc., signs himself with the Blessed Sacrament, saying, Corpus Domini nostri, etc., and communicates ; he immediately consumes the wine with a part of the Host in the chalice, without saying anything ; afterwards he washes his fingers (the deacon pouring, as usual, the w T ine into the chalice), takes the ablution, and bowing, with his hands joined, in the middle of the altar, says only, Quod ore sumpsimus, Domine, etc. After this, he goes to the Epistle side, puts on the mitre, washes his hands, and goes to his seat ; where, having taken off his vestments, and put on the cape, he says Vespers with the clergy, who have by this time taken off the sacred vestments, and put on their surplices. The caudles are extinguished, and after the antiphon of the Magnificat has been repeated, the Bishop goes to the middle, kneels at the faldstool during the Christus and the Miserere; after which, he says the prayer, Res pice, and retires, as usual. CHAPTER XIL HOLY SATURDAY. Article I. Things to be Prepared. 1. The church, the high altar, and the baptismal font should be prepared as directed, page 247. Likewise, the triple candle, the paschal candle, the new fire, the grains of incense, and everything else, as there directed. 2. In the sacristy, the sacred vestments should be pre- pared as usual for the assistant priest, the two assistant deacons, the deacon and sub-deacon ; for the clergy accord- ing to their order and dignity ; with this difference, that HOLY SATURDAY. 355 to-day violet vestments must be prepared ; the deacon and sub-deacon make use of folded chasubles. Under the violet, white vestments must be prepared. 3. On the altar, two front veils, white and purple ; the sacred vestments for the Bishop must be double, that is, white vestments should be placed immediately upon the altar, and over them violet vestments. 4. The Bishop's chair should be adorned with white ornaments, and then covered with purple cloth. Article II. The Blessing of the New Fire. 1. The Bishop, unless prevented by some urgent cause, ought to bless the new fire ; for this purpose he puts on the amice, alb, cincture, violet stole and cope; wearing the mitre ; and holding the crosier in his hand, attended by the deacon and sub-deacon, and the two assistant deacons in folded chasubles, and the assistant priest in cope, and preceded by the cross and the clergy, he goes to the porch, where the new fire has been lighted, and blesses it as directed, page 252, and in the Roman Missal. After which, he takes off his vestments, and puts on the cape. Article III. The Exultei, and the Blessing of the Paschal Candle. 1. The Bishop, dressed in cape, sits on his pontifical chair, having at his side the two assistant deacons, and the assist- ant priest, and puts incense into the censer and blesses it, the assistant priest presenting to him the incense-boat. 2. The sub-deacon in violet folded chasuble, taking the processional cross, goes with the deacon, who is habited in a white dalmatic, with a sufficient number of attending clergymen, to the place where the triple candle and other necessary things have been prepared. The Bishop, with his assistants, remains at his seat, and the rest of the clergy in the sanctuary. 356 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. 3. The master of ceremonies walks first ; then the censer- bearer, having at his left an acolyte ; after them a sub- deacon carrying the cross ; the deacon follows ; and, lastly, four acolytes, two by two. 4. On arriving at the place prepared, the master of cere- monies lights a candle from the new fire ; the deacon takes the triple candle, and one of the acolytes the plate with the grains of incense; after this, they go back in the following order : first the acolyte, carrying with both hands the plate with the grains of incense ; on his left, the censer-bearer, swinging the censer gently ; second, the sub-deacon carry- ing the cross ; third, the deacon with the triple candle, and on his left, the master of ceremonies with the lighted candle; lastly, the four acolytes, two by two. 5. As the deacon enters the church, he lowers the triple candle, that one of the branches may be lighted by the master of ceremonies, then he raises it again ; and he, as well as all the others in the procession, together with the Bishop and all the clergy, kneel on one knee, when Lumen Christi is sung by the deacon ; and rise when Deo gratias is answered by the clergy. The same is done a second time when they arrive at the middle of the church, and a third time when they arrive before the altar ; but the dea- con, at each time, raises his voice one tone higher. 6. Then the Bishop and all in the sanctuary sit down. Those of the procession rise, and place themselves as directed in the preceding Book, chapter viii. The deacon having left the triple candle in the hands of one of the acolytes, receives from the master of ceremonies the Missal ; and having made the usual genuflection to the altar, and rever- ences to the Bishop and the clergy, goes to the Bishop, and without kissing his hand, says, Jube, Domne, etc.; the Bishop makes the sign of the cross towards him, using the accustomed form, Dominus sit, etc., saying, however, Pas- chale prceconium, instead of JEvangelium. 7. The deacon, having received the blessing, goes from the Bishop's seat to the middle before the altar, between the cross-bearer and the acolyte, who carries the triple candle, and having there made a genuflection, and the usual reverences, as directed in page 252, he goes to sing the HOLY SATURDAY. 357 Preface, which begins by the word Exultet, and performs everything as directed in the same place. 8. When the deacon commences, the Bishop and all the clergy in the sanctuary rise, and during it stand with their heads uncovered. Article IV. From the end of the Exultet to the Benediction of the Baptis- mal Font. 1. The Exultet being ended, the deacon shuts the Missal, leaves it on its stand, goes to the bench of the sacred min- isters, takes off his white maniple, dalmatic, and stole, and puts on the violet stole ; the sub-deacon leaves the cross by the side-table, and takes off his folded chasuble and mani- ple, and with the deacon goes to the Bishop's seat, and the acolyte places the triple candle on its stand at the Gospel side. 2. The Bishop and all the clergy, standing with their heads uncovered, say, Pater et Ave, secretly, and then sit down, and None is recited. After the last Psalm, the Bishop kneels at the faldstool, the clergy kneeling likewise during the Christus and the Miserere; after which, the Bishop says the prayer, Respice. Then having returned to his seat, he reads the Psalm, Quam dileda, etc., with the Gloria Patri, and the other verses with the following pray- ers ; at the same time he puts on the white sandals ; after the prayers he washes his hands, and puts on the pontifical vestments of violet color, including the maniple and the plain mitre, reading the appropriate prayers. The clergy likewise put on their sacred vestments ; and the Bishop being vested, the two assistant deacons in violet folded chasubles^ and the assistant priest in violet cope, go to the Bishop's chair, and the deacons to their bench, where they put on their violet chasubles and maniples, and sit down. 3. The Bishop rises, takes the crosier in his left hand, and attended by his assistants, and the deacon and sub- deacon, goes up to the altar, which he kisses, after having taken off his mitre. Then having made a reverence to the 358 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. cross, he puts on the mitre, takes the crosier in his left hand, and attended by the assistant deacons and priest, goes to his chair, where he sits ; the deacon and sub-deacon go to their bench. All in the sanctuary sit down. 4. A book-stand is placed in the middle of the sanctuary ; a clergyman, attended by the master of ceremonies, goes to it, makes a genuflection to the altar, and the usual rever- ences to the Bishop and to the clergy, on each side of the sanctuary, and reads the first prophecy, without the title. In the meantime, the Bishop reads the same prophecy out of the book, which an acolyte holds open before him. Whilst he reads, his assistants stand near him. The singer, having finished the prophecy, and made the usual genu- flection and reverences, goes to kiss the Bishop's hand, and to receive his blessing. Then the Bishop rises, sings Oremus, the first assistant deacon, Flectamus genua. At these words, all in the sanctuary (the Bishop only excepted) make a genuflection, and the second deacon sings, Levate; then all rise, and the Bishop sings the prayer out of the book, which the assistant priest holds open before him. The same is done in regard to all the other prophecies, with the exception, that after the fourth, eighth, and eleventh prophe- cies, the choir sings the Tract, and the Bishop reads it. After the twelfth prophecy, Flectamus genua and Levate are not sung. Article V. Blessing the Baptismal Font. 1. After the prayer which follows the last prophecy, the Bishop takes off the maniple, chasuble, dalmatic, and tunic, and puts on a violet cope ; then, with his mitre on, and the crosier in his left hand, preceded by the cross, carried by the sub-deacon and all the clergy, arranged as directed at page 255, between two assistant deacons he goes to the baptismal font, the assistant priest walking immediately before him at the right of the deacon, and he does every- thing as directed in the same place, and in the Roman Missal. HOLY SATUEDAY. 359 2. If any child or adult is to be baptized, the Bishop baptizes them, as directed in the Roman Ritual. 3. After the blessing of the font, they return to the sanctuary in procession, in the same order as they came to the font. Article VI. From the Benediction of the Font to the beginning of Mass. 1. The Bishop, on arriving at the high altar, takes off his cope and mitre, and kneels, leaning on the faldstool ; the assistants, deacon and sub-deacon, and all the clergy, like- wise kneel ; and the Litany is sung by two chanters kneel- ing before two stools behind the Bishop. If there is an ordination, those, who are to be ordained, prostrate themselves during the Litany, which the singers interrupt at the proper place when the Bishop is to say, Ut hos electos, etc. 2. When the chanters sing the verse, Per mysterium sanctce incarnationis tuce, the deacon and sub-deacon go to the sacristy, take off their violet vestments, and put on white, and come out immediately. 3. At the verse, Peccatores, the Bishop rises with the assistant deacons and priests ; the latter go to the sacristy to take off the violet vestments, and put on white; the Bishop, standing in the same place, assisted by the deacon and sub-deacon, takes off the violet vestments, and puts on the white ; all the clergy in sacred vestments do the same. In the meanwhile the acolytes remove from the altar the violet front- veil, and from the tabernacle the canopy of the same color, and from the small table the violet veil that covered the white ; the candles are lighted, the relic cases are placed between the candlesticks, and the carpet is spread. The chanters should take care to sing the Litany very slowly from the verse Peccatores. 360 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. Article VII. From the beginning to the end of Mass. 1. The Bishop, having put on the white vestments, when the singers begin Kyrie, makes the Confession with his ministers, saying the Psalm Judica and the Gloria Patri; goes up to the altar, kisses both it and the book of the Gospels ; puts incense into the censer and blesses it ; in- censes the cross and altar, and is incensed, as usual, by the deacon. Then he goes to his seat, where, having said the Kyrie, he sings, Gloria in exeelsis Deo. Then all the bells are rung, and the organ is played. 2. After the hymn, Gloria in exeelsis, the Bishop rises without mitre, turns towards the people, and sings, Pax vobis, and the prayer, Deus, qui hane sacratissimam noctem, etc. The rest is done as usual. 3. The sub-deacon, having sung the Epistle, leaves the Missal in the hands of the master of ceremonies, and forth- with going to the Bishop, says in an audible voice, Reveren- dissime Pater, Annuntio vobis gaudium magnum, quod est Alleluia, and kisses his hand ; then, either the sub-deacon or a chanter intones Alleluia to the Bishop, who, rising without mitre, sings thrice, Alleluia, raising every time his voice one tone higher, and the choir every time repeats it; and after the third Alleluia, sings the verse, Confitemini ; then the Bishop sits down and continues Mass as usual. 4. At the Gospel, the acolytes do not carry the candle- sticks, but the book is incensed as usual, and the deacon asks the blessing. Pax Domini sit semper vobiscum is said ; but the Pax is not given. Agnus Dei is not said, neither the Communio. 5. The Bishop, after the communion and the usual ablu- tions, washes his hands, goes to his seat, seats himself, and the choir begins Alleluia, in place of Vespers. At the Magnificat, the sub-deacon intones the antiphon to the Bishop, which he repeats, standing ; then he sits with his mitre on, puts incense into the censer, and when the Mag- nificat is begun, he goes to the altar, takes off his mitre, CEREMONIES. 361 makes the reverence, kisses the altar, incenses the cross and the altar, returns to his seat, is incensed, as well as all the clergy, as usual, and stands till the end of the Magnificat. Whilst the antiphon is repeated, he sits, pats on the mitre, returns to the altar at the end of the antiphon, sings Dom- inus vobiscum, and the prayer ; the deacon sings, Bene- dicamus Domino, Alleluia, Alleluia; the Bishop gives the solemn blessing, and the Indulgences are published. Then the Bishop disrobes and retires, as usual. CHAPTER XIII. CEREMONIES TO BE OBSERVED IN PROVINCIAL COUNCILS.* Article I. What is to be done before it opens. 1. Previous notice should be given of the celebration of the Provincial Council to all the Bishops of the prov- ince, and others who are to attend. 2. On the feast of the Epiphany, when the movable feasts are published, as directed in the Roman Pontifical, Part III, Tit. De publicatione festorum mobilium in JEpi- phania Domini, adding to the usual formula before the publication of the movable feast, immediately following the day of the celebration of the Council, these words, Die . . . mensis . . . hujus anni, quce erit dominica . . . Con- cilium provinciale Deo adjuvante in Metropolitana Ecclesia inchoabitur. 3. On. the three Sundays immediately preceding the opening of the Council, it should be published from the pulpit before the sermon, in all the churches of the prov- ince, and the prayers of the people requested for its success. * Ex Cseremoniali Episcoporum, L. i, c. 31, et ex Pontificali Ko- mano, Part III, Tit. Ordo ad Synodurn. 31 362 PONTIFICAL CEEEMONIES. It is usual on such occasions, that the Bishop of each diocese order the Collect, De Spiritu Sancto, to be added at Mass every day till the conclusion of the Council. Article II. How the Metropolitan Church is to be adorned and arranged. 1. The Metropolitan, or any other church in which the Council is to be celebrated, should be adorned as for the greatest festivals. On the evening before, the bells, with festive peals, should announce the opening of the Council. 2. The Archbishop's seat is placed at the altar ; those of the Bishops on each side of the sanctuary : those nearest to the altar are to be occupied by the senior bishops, accord- ing to priority of consecration ; they should be raised on a platform by one or two steps. The other clergymen may sit against the railing of the sanctuary; the vicars-general of any diocese, if present, taking precedence, according to priority of ordination ; next, the superiors of clerical con- gregations ; next, the provincials of religious orders ; next, the theologians, according to priority of ordination. The first place is on the Gospel side. This arrangement is not quite conformable to that prescribed by the Roman Pon- tifical, in which it is required that the Bishops should sit in a semicircle before the Archbishop, and behind them the priests ; but we have adapted ours to suit best the sanc- tuary of our churches. 3. The Archbishop's usual chair should be likewise pre- pared and adorned as on great festivals, with stools on each side for the two assistant deacons ; also a third one for the assistant priest. 4. The seats for the deacon and sub-deacon are to be placed, as usual, at the Epistle side, where also the side- table should be placed. 5. On those days on which one of the bishops sings High Mass, a faldstool should be prepared on the Epistle side, on a small platform, where the officiating Bishop will THE OPENING. 363 sit, with his face turned towards the people ; on the same side, near the side-wall of the sanctuary, and in the same direction with it, a bench should be placed, where the dea- con and sub-deacon with the assistant priest sit. Article III. THE OPENING OF THE COUNCIL. Section I. — What is to be prepared for it 1. In one of the rooms of the Archbishop's house, the following vestments are to be prepared : For the Archbishop, sandals and stockings, amice, alb, cincture, with red stole and cope, crosier, and mitre. For the Archbishop's assistant priest, a red cope, which he puts over his surplice or on his rochet, if he is entitled to use it. For the Archbishop's assistant deacons, red vestments suitable to their order. For each of the bishops, an amice, cope, and mitre ; they put the amice over their rochet. For the officiating deacon and sub-deacon, the sacred vestments of their order. For priests, sacerdotal vestments. If other deacons and sub-deacons be present, besides those who officiate, a sufficient number of sacred vestments suitable to their order. For the Archbishop, on the altar, a chasuble, the dal- matic, and tunic and gloves, which he puts on immediately before he begins Mass, having taken off the cope ; also the pallium. If the Archbishop does not celebrate Mass, he remains in cope, and assists at the Mass celebrated by the senior Bishop of the Province — who, in this case, puts on the pontifical dress in the Archbishop's house, and is attended by the deacon and sub-deacon, and an assistant priest. 364 PROVINCIAL COUNCILS. Section II. — The Procession. 1. All the prelates and clergy being dressed, the proces- sion moves from the Archbishop's house in the following order : The censer-bearer and the second master of ceremonies. The cross-bearer, between the acolytes carrying their candlesticks. The inferior clergy in surplices, two by two. Those in sacred orders in dalmatics, two by two. The priests in chasubles, two by two. The Bishops in mitre and cope, two by two, according to the time of consecration, those last consecrated going before. The senior Bishop — pontifically dressed to celebrate Mass, preceded by his assistant priest, and between the deacon and sub-deacon, in case the Archbishop does not sing it — should walk after the other bishops. The sub-deacon. The assistant priest at the right of the deacon. The Archbishop's cross. The Archbishop between the two assistant deacons, and followed by the crosier and mitre bearers. 2. During the procession, the bells ring continually, and the clergy sing psalms. 3. The organ is played as the procession enters the church. 4. The clergy, as they arrive at the sanctuary, make a genuflection, bow to each other, and go to their places, where they remain standing. 5. When the Archbishop has arrived at his seat, all the clergy sit down ; and he takes off his cope, and puts on the other vestments for Mass, if he celebrate. Section III. — Ilass. 1. The Mass is to be of the Holy Ghost, with Gloria and Credo, without any commemoration of the current Feast, or Sunday ; the last Gospel is that of St. John. The Archbishop wears the pallium. mass. 365 2. The Mass is sung as usual. The Bishops and priests in sacred vestments do not kneel at the Confession ; they make it two by two ; the one that is at the right, begins, the other at the left answers, at the Confession, and at the Kyrie. They bow to one another before they begin, and after they have finished, not only for the Confession and Kyrie, but also for the Gloria, Credo, Sanctus, and Agnus Dei, which they recite together. 3. The deacon incenses the Bishops with three swings, and the priests in sacred vestments with two, in the order that will be pointed out for the Pax in the following number. 4. The Pax is carried by the assistant priest, first to the senior Bishop, who sits first at the Gospel side, then to the second senior Bishop, who sits first at the Epistle side ; afterwards to the priest who sits first at the Gospel side, then to the other, who sits in the first place at the Epistle side. 5. The Archbishop does not give the blessing at the end of Mass, but, as it will be said below, at the end of the Session. Section IV. — The Ceremonies for the first Session, or the Opening of the Council. 1. It is more convenient that the sermon, which is chiefly intended for the instruction of the people, should be preached after Mass ; during this time the Archbishop takes off the chasuble and tunic, and puts on the cope, either in the sac- risty, or in the church at his seat. 2. The faldstool is prepared below the lowest step of the altar, in the middle. The Archbishop, attended by the assistant priest and deacon, goes to the middle, salutes the Bishops on each side, and kneels before the faldstool; hav- ing taken off his mitre, he intones the antiphon, Exaudi nos, Domine, which is continued and chanted by the choir; after the antiphon, the chanters intone the 68th Psalm,* Salvum me fac, Deus, quoniam intraverunt aquce usque ad animam * It is found at the beginning of Matins of the V. Feria. 366 PROVINCIAL COUNCILS. meam, which is alternately sung by the clergy. After the first verse, all rise, the Archbishop sits on the faldstool, which is placed in the middle of the platform of the altar, having at his side the two assistant deacons and the assist- ant priest at the right of the first assistant deacon, the book- bearer and the candle-bearer holding respectively the book and the candle before him. The Bishops likewise, with their mitres, and the clergy, with their caps on, sit during the Psalm. 3. After the Psalm is ended, and the anthem Exaudi repeated, all rise, and the Archbishop and Bishops take off their mitres. The Archbishop, turned towards the altar, sings the prayer, Adsumus, Domine Sancte Spiritus, etc., at the end of which the clergy answer, Amen. Then the Arch- bishop sings Or emus, and the prayer, Omnipotens, sempiterne Dens; after which the clergy answer, Amen. 4. Then the Archbishop, with his mitre on, kneels before the faldstool ; the Bishops likewise kneel with their mitres on, and all the clergy kneel at their places. The two chant- ers, kneeling in the middle of the sanctuary, sing the Litany of the Saints, to which the clergy answer. 5. When the chanters have sung the verse, Ut omnibus fidelibus defunetis, etc., and the clergy answered, Te roga- mus, audi nos, the Archbishop alone rises, takes the crosier in his left hand, and turned towards the clergy, sings, Ut hane prcesentem Synodum visitare, disponere, et benedicere digneris ; the clergy answer, Te rogamus, audi nos. The chanters continue the Litany to the end, viz., as far as Kyrie eleison, Ghriste eleison, and Kyrie eleison, inclusively. 6. The Litanies being ended, they all rise, the Arch- bishop and Bishops take T)ff their mitres, the Archbishop, turned towards the altar, sings, Or emus ; the first deacon, Flectamus genua, and the second, Levate. The Archbishop sings the prayer, Da, qucesumus, ecclesiw tuo3, .etc. 7. The prayer being ended, the Archbishop goes up to the altar, sits on the chair or faldstool placed in the middle, ' turning his back to the altar. The clergy sit in the mean- time, and the Archbishop puts the incense into the censer and blesses it, as usual. The deacon carries the Missal, and lays it on the altar, kneels, says, Munda cor meum, asks the mass. 367 Archbishop's blessing, and goes with the sub-deacon, mas- ter of ceremonies, censer-bearer, and acolytes, to the place where the Gospel is usually sung ; having first made the genuflection to the altar, and bowed to the Archbishop, Bishops, and clergy, he sings in the usual manner the Gos- pel, which is taken from St. Luke, c. 9, from v. 1 to 6. 8. After the Gospel, the sub-deacon carries the Missal to the Archbishop, who kisses it ; and the deacon incenses him, as usual. 9. After the Archbishop has been incensed, he takes off his mitre, and kneels before his chair, or faldstool; the Bishops likewise, having taken off their mitres, and all the clergy, kneel at their places. The Archbishop intones the hymn, Veni, Creator Spiritus, and the choir continues to sing it ; after the first strophe, they all rise, and stand till the end of the whole hymn. 10. After the hymn, all sit, and the Archbishop makes a Latin allocution to the Council, either as it is in the Roman Pontifical, or any other, as he pleases. Should he choose to have another discourse addressed to the Council by some one else, it may be made at this time. 11. The Archbishop addresses the Fathers of the Coun- cil to this effect : Reverendissimi Patres, venerabiles fratres, placetne vobis ad Dei gloriam et honorem, et ad Catholicce Ecclesio3 amplificationem Concilium provinciate .... legit- ime convocation, et hie congregatum hodierno die aperiri et inchoari. The Bishops severally reply, Placet, aperiatur. Then the Archbishop, in his own name and that of his col- leagues, turning towards the people, says, Christi nomine invocato, decernimus Sanctam Synodum provincialem .... esse apertam et ita judicamus.* 12. The Archbishop then orders his secretary to read the names of those whom he proposes as officers of the Council ; which being read, he says, Placetne vobis, venerabiles fratres, hosce in Concilii officiates eligendos. The Bishops severally answer, Placet. The Archbishop's secretary then reads the Decree in these words : Reverendisaimus D. Archiepisco- pics .... una cum Episcopis in hoc sacro Concilio Pro- * Ex Concil. Rheniensi, an. 1583. 368 PROVINCIAL COUNCILS. vinciali congregatis decernit hosce Peverendos vivos in offici- ates hujus sancti Concilii eligendos esse, et legitime jam electos, nempe Promotorem .... Secretarios .... Magistros Cce- remoniarum .... Cantores. 13. The Promoter addresses the Archbishop : lllustris- sime ac PeverendissimeDomine,peto ut legantur Sacro-sancti Concilii Tridentini deer eta de Professionefidei, et de residentia. The Archbishop, addressing the Bishops, says: Venerabiles fratres, placetne vobis ut legantur deer eta Concilii Tridentini de Professione fidei et de residentia f The Bishops sever- ally reply, Placet legantur. Then the Archdeacon reads the decrees. 14. Then, such of the Bishops as have not in a former Council made the profession of faith, approach to the front of the altar, take off their mitres, make a genuflection on the lowest step, salute the Archbishop, and kneeling on the step, simultaneously recite the Profession of Faith, as in the Roman Pontifical. In saying the last words, Sic me Deus adjuvet, etc., each Bishop places his right hand on the Book of the Gospel. After having made the usual genu- flection and salutation, they retire to their places. 15. The Archbishop then gives the solemn pontifical blessing, which the Bishops receive standing, with their heads uncovered, and profoundly inclined. After this, they all retire as usual to the sacristy, where they disrobe. Article IV. Mode of procedure of the Council. 1. Each day, two meetings, called Congregations, are usually held ; the one private, consisting of the Bishops alone, with the secretaries of the Council, in the sacristy of the Metropolitan church, or in the Archbishop's house, in the morning, from about nine till twelve; the other public, in the afternoon, held in the Metropolitan church, from about four to six. To this latter are invited the Theologians of the Archbishop and Bishops, with the Su- periors of the Religious Orders and Clerical bodies, and all the officers of the Council. The chief matters, which MODE OF PROCEDURE. 369 each prelate intends to submit to the consideration of the Council, are usually made known by him to the Arch- bishop, within a reasonable time before the holding of the Council, and by the Archbishop communicated to the Bishops generally. The Promoter, after the opening of the Council, appoints select committees, called also Con- gregations, of the inferior clergy there assembled, to whom such matters as the Bishops deem proper are referred for examination. They assemble in the morning at conve- nient places to investigate the matters submitted to them respectively, and their written reports are read in the public Congregations ; after the reading of the reports, the Pro- moter suggests that any clergyman, who dissents therefrom, or who wishes to propose any amendment, or to make any observation, may freely, but respectfully, deliver his senti- ments. If no one rises to speak, the Promoter proposes that the report be referred to the Bishops for private con- sideration. Should any one choose to speak, the reference is made after the sentiments have been delivered. In speaking, the clergy follow the order in which they are seated. No clergyman speaks a second time on the same subject, unless he obtains special leave. 2. In the private Congregations of the Bishops, the matters to be submitted to the consideration of the clergy are designated ; the reports of the clergy are subsequently read, and the matters finally decided. Each prelate, ac- cording to priority of consecration, is free to express his sentiments on the respective matters treated of in the Coun- cil. After the matters have been canvassed, the question is put by the Archbishop, and the decision made by the majority of suffrages, which are given according to the order of consecration. 3. It is usual in Councils, that all propositions be ex- pressed in the Latin language and given in writing, and that the decrees be in the first instance drawn up in that language. 4. No special exercise of devotion is prescribed for the various Congregations. It is usual, however, to begin by the recital of the hymn Veni Creator Spiritus. The evening Congregation is opened by the recital of the Veni, Sancte 370 PROVINCIAL COUNCILS. Spiritus, etc., and closed by reciting the Sub tuum pre- sidium. In this article we have stated the usages of the Baltimore Councils. Article V. Second solemn Session. 1. On some day during the holding of the Council, a second solemn session is celebrated; High Mass for the de- ceased Bishops and clergy is sung by one of the prelates, the other prelates assisting in their pontifical robes ; a dis- course is usually pronounced after Mass, by a prelate or priest appointed for that purpose. 2. A faldstool or chair for the celebrant is placed on a small platform in front of the altar, at the Epistle side, so that the celebrant when sitting has his face towards the people. A bench for the assistant priest, deacon, and sub- deacon, is placed near the faldstool, parallel to the side- wall of the sanctuary. The assistant priest takes his seat on it, nearest to the Bishop's left hand; next to him sits the deacon on the same bench ; the sub-deacon sits at the side of the deacon. 3. The prelates dress in the sacristy, and proceed thence to the church, in the same order as on the first day, except that the celebrant with his assistants follows the other prelates, and walks immediately before the Archbishop. 4. The prelates go to their respective seats, and the cele- brant with his assistants, having made a genuflection before the altar, salutes the Archbishop and the prelates, and then begins Mass as usual. 5. The ceremonies of the Mass are the same as on other occasions, with the following exceptions. After the Con- fession the Bishop ascends to the altar and kisses it, and then, having received the mitre, makes a profound bow to the cross, and goes directly, per breviorem, to the faldstool, where the sub-deacon, having taken off the mitre, the cele- brant and assistants standing with their faces turned to the altar, the celebrant reads the Introit, and says the Kyrie; he turns to the people to say, Dominus vobiscum, and turns SECOND SOLEMN SESSION. 371 again to the altar to say the prayer. He sits whilst the sub-deacon sings the Epistle, which being terminated, he himself reads it with the Tract, Sequentia, Munda cor meum, and the Gospel. The Offertory is read by him standing with his face towards the altar, which posture is observed whenever he reads or sings anything standing. 6. At the end of the Mass, the celebrant with his assist- ants retires to the sacristy, and the Archbishop from his chair performs the absolution of the dead as usual. 7. After the absolution, the black ornaments are laid aside, and the prelates put on copes. The ceremonies of the session are performed as prescribed in the Roman Pon- tifical, — for the second day of the synod, beginning with the anthem, Propitius estopeccatis nostris, Domine, nequando dicant gentes : ubi est Deus eorumf and the Psalm 78, Deus, venerunt gentes in hcereditatem tuam, etc., which may be found in the Breviary, at Fer. V. ad Matutin. The prel- ates and clergy kneel while the anthem and first verse of the Psalm are sung, and then resume their mitres, and sit until the end of the Psalm, as directed in the first session. The prayers are then sung by the Archbishop, after which he resumes his seat on the platform of the altar, and puts in and blesses the incense, and gives the blessing to the deacon ; then all the prelates and clergy rise, and stand with their heads uncovered, while the deacon sings the Gospel, Designavit Dominus, Luke x, from the 1st verse to the 9th inclusive, with the usual ceremonies. 8. Afterwards, all kneel with their heads uncovered, whilst the first verse of the hymn, Veni, Creator tSpiritus, is sung, which being intoned by the Archbishop, is con- tinued by the choir and clergy. After the first verse, all rise, and stand until the termination of the hymn. Then all resume their seats, and the Archbishop addresses them in the Avords of the Pontifical, or others, if he thinks proper. Such decrees, as have been already agreed on, may be then read, and the assent of the Fathers asked, after which the pontifical blessing is given, and all depart. 372 PROVINCIAL COUNCILS. Article VI. Third solemn Session. 1. On the last clay of the Council the third solemn ses- sion is held. The prelates wear copes and mitres as in the other sessions. Solemn Mass is celebrated by the Arch- bishop, or by one of the Bishops. 2. When one of the Bishops celebrates, he proceeds be- fore the Archbishop to the sanctuary, as before expressed, and observes the other peculiar ceremonies stated in the preceding article. On ascending to the altar, after the Con- fession, he makes the usual incensing, and then, having received the mitre^ he stands at the Epistle side of the altar, with his face turned towards the side-wall, and is in- censed by the deacon. He then retires to his faldstool and reads the Introit. The censer-bearer, in the meantime, carries the censer to the assistant priest of the Archbishop, who incenses the Archbishop. After the Gospel, the cele- brant is incensed by the deacon, and then the Archbishop by his assistant priest. After the Offertory, the celebrant is incensed by his deacon, the Archbishop by his assistant priest, and the prelates by the deacon, with three swings, the clergy in sacred vestments, with two, and the inferior clergy with one. 3. The Pax is given by the celebrant, first to the assist- ant priest of the Archbishop, who, advancing to the altar, kneels down as usual, whilst the previous prayer is recited. The deacon and sub -deacon then receive the Pax from the celebrant. In the meantime, the assistant priest of the Archbishop gives the Pax to the Archbishop, who imme- diately gives it to his assistant deacons. The assistant priest of the celebrant, after the deacon and sub-deacon have received the Pax, goes to the assistant priest of the Archbishop, and from him receives thePa.i-, which he sub- sequently gives to the first prelate on each side, and to the first among the clergymen. The Bishop, who receives from him the Pax, gives it to the next, and so on. 4. The celebrant does not give any blessing at the end of Mass, but having secretly said the prayer, Placeat, etc., THIRD SOLEMN SESSION. 373 recites the Gospel of St. John, and, with his attendants, retires to the sacristy. 5. The Archbishop advances towards the altar and kneels by his faldstool below the lowest step. He begins the anthem, Exaudi nos, JDomine, quoniam benigna est miseri- cordia tua, et secundum midtitudinem miserationum tuarum respice nos, Domine; which is chanted as the Psalm, Salvum me fac, Deus, on the first day. Then three prayers are sung by the Archbishop, and the Gospel is sung, taken from the xviii chap, of St. Matthew, from the 15th to the 22d v. The hymn, Veni, Creator, is sung as in the preced- ing sessions. The Archbishop, seated on his faldstool on the platform of the altar, addresses his brethren in the words of the Pontifical, or in such other terms as he deems expedient. A sermon is delivered by a prelate, or priest, appointed by the Council, unless it has been already deliv- ered during Mass, or subsequently. The secretary of the Council, by order of the Archbishop, reads the decrees which have been prepared in the private Congregations of the prelates, and the Promoter solicits that they be publicly approved of and confirmed by the Council, in these words : JReverendissime Pater, ego N. hujus Sancti Concilii promoter, peto ut decreta hcee quo3 lecta sunt, a patribus hujus Concilii approbentur et confirmentur , ad ecclesio3 Catholicoz augmentum. Then the Archbishop proposes them to the judgment of the prelates, in these words : Placetne vobis, Venerabiles Fratres, hcec quce lecta sunt decreta approbare et confirmare. The Bishops severally reply, Placet, approbamus, confirm- amus. Then the secretary reads the decree in these words : Nos N. N. Archiepiscopus aliique episcopi in hoc Sacro Concilio adunati, decreta ho3C, quaz mox lecta sunt, appro- bamus, et conjirmamus. Then the prelates sign the decrees, which are placed by the secretary on the altar ; the Arch- bishop first subscribes, in these words, Ego N. Archiepis- copus definiens subscripsi. The Archbishop, hav- ing retired from the altar to his seat, the other Bishops, according to priority of consecration, successively advance towards the high altar, and, having made a genuflection and saluted the Archbishop, severally subscribe the decrees in these words, Ego N. epis. N. definiens subscripsi. 374 PONTIFICAL, CEREMONIES. 6. The Archbishop having returned to the faldstool, on the platform of the altar, the Promoter solicits that the Council be terminated, in words of this import : Reveren- dissime Pater, ego N. hujus S. Concilii Promoter, peto ut hide Concilio Provinciali finis jam fiat. The Archbishop inquires into the wishes of the Fathers in words to this effect : Venerabiles Fratres, placetne vobis ad Dei Omnipotentis laudem hujus Concilii Provincialis finem jam fieri. The Fathers severally answer, Placet. The secretary then reads the decree in these terms : Nos N. Archiepiscopus aliique Patres, qui hide Concilio Provinciali intersumus, cum absoluta sint, quo3 pro temporis ratione agi gerique posse videbantur, cumque pastoralis cura ad ecclesiarum nostra- rum status et pastorales vigilias revocet, propter ea huic Sancto Concilio finem imponi censuimus. 7. The prayer, Nulla est, Domine, as in the Roman Pon- tifical, is then sung by the Archbishop. 8. Afterwards the Acclamations are sung by the arch- deacon, the prelates and clergy singing the responses. 9. After the Acclamations, the Te Deum is sung, and after it the prayer, P?*o gratiarum actione; Deus cujus misericordio3 non est numerus, etc. The Archbishop then having returned to his seat, gives the Pax to each of the bishops ; each of them, as he advances to receive it, retain- ing his mitre, salutes the Archbishop. Each Bishop sub- sequently gives the Pax to ail of his brethren in their respective places. The Session closes with the solemn blessing of the Archbishop. The deacon sings, Recedamus in pace, and the clergy respond, In nomine Christi. Amen. They then return to the sacristy, and disrobe as usual. DIOCESAN SYNODS. 375 CHAPTER XIV. CEREMONIES TO BE OBSERVED IN DIOCESAN SYNODS. 1. The priests and clergymen of every grade, who by right or custom are bound to come to the Synod, assemble in the city, or such other place as the Bishop may prescribe. 2. On the first day of the Synod, at a very early hour in the morning, the Bishop in his ordinary episcopal dress (cappam indutus), accompanied by all the clergy in sur- plice, goes to the church, puts on the pontifical vestments at his seat, celebrates the Mass of the Holy Ghost, and gives communion to the clergy. At the end of Mass the faldstool or seat is placed on the floor of the sanctuary, near the lowest step, about the middle of the altar ; and another seat on the platform of the altar ; (the faldstool, however, may suffice, and be placed on the platform at the proper time). 3. The Bishop, over his rochet, or over his surplice, if he be a regular, puts on the amice, stole, red cope, and precious mitre, and bearing his pastoral staff, goes before the altar ; the deacon and sub-deacon, in red ornaments, such as they use at Mass, accompanying him, one on each side. Kneeling there before the faldstool, and having laid aside the mitre, he begins the antiphon, Exaudi nos, Domine, etc., which the choir continues. The Psalm 68, Salvum me fac Deus, is then sung. After the first verse, the Bishop sits with the mitre, and so remains until the antiphon is repeated, after the conclusion of the Psalm. 4. The Bishop rises, and turning towards the altar, after the mitre has been taken off, says the prayer, Ad- sumus Domine, etc., to which all reply, Amen. He then says, Or emus, Omnipotent sempiterne Deus, etc., as in the Pontifical.' 5. At the end of this latter prayer, the Bishop, having put on the mitre, kneels, leaning on the faldstool, and all 376 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. the clergy kneel, whilst the chanters sing the Litany. After the verse, Ut omnibus jidelibus defunetis, etc., J;he Bishop rises, and holding his crosier in his left hand, standing with his face towards the Synod, says, Ut hanc prcesentem Synodum visitare, disponere, et benedicere digneris, JR. Te rogamus, audi nos. In saying this, he makes the sign of the cross over all ; and then he again kneels as before until the end of the Litany. 6. The Litany being sung, all rise, and the Bishop, laying aside his mitre, says, with his face turned towards the altar, Or emus. The deacon says, Flectamus genua; the sub-deacon, Levate. Then the Bishop recites the prayer, Da, quwsumus, etc. This being finished, he re- sumes the mitre, ascends to the seat prepared for him on the platform of the altar, and sits with his back to- wards the altar. He puts incense into the censer, and blesses it, as usual. The deacon, in red dalmatic, preceded by the censer-bearer and acolytes, and by the sub-deacon in tunic, after the pontifical blessing, sings the Gospel, Luke ix, 1, 6. The sub-deacon then presents the book of the Gospels to the Bishop to kiss, and the deacon sub- sequently incenses him. The Bishop then putting off his mitre, kneels before the seat, with his face towards the altar, and all the others kneel at the same time, in their respective places. The hymn, Veni, Creator Spiritus, is begun by the bishop, and continued by the choir. After the first verse, the Bishop rises, and stands without his mitre, and with his face towards the altar, until the end of the hymn ; and in like manner all the others rise with the Bishop. Then all sit, and the Bishop having resumed the mitre, and seated himself on the platform of the altar, addresses them in the words of the Pontifical, or others, at discretion. 7. After the address, or before, as the Bishop may think proper, a discourse is delivered by some learned priest, who in it treats of ecclesiastical discipline, of the divine mysteries, and of the correction of abuses, according as the Bishop may think fit. After the discourse, any complaints that the clergy may think fit to put forward may be made. 8. Then the Archdeacon reads aloud from the pulpit the DIOCESAN SYNODS. 377 Decrees of the Council of Trent, regarding residence and the profession of the faith, which all who are bound to it make in the hands of the Bishop, according to the form prescribed in the Pontifical. Finally, all are charitably admonished to conduct them- selves with edification in all respects during the Synod. The Bishop, after the admonition, gives the* solemn bless- ing. 9. On the second day of the Synod, the clergy assemble again in the church, and Mass being ended, the Bishop, dressed as on the first day, proceeds to the foot of the altar, accompanied by the deacon and sub-deacon, who likewise are dressed as on the preceding day ; then kneel- ing before the faldstool, and having laid aside his mitre, he begins the antiphon, Propitius esto, which is continued by the choir. The LXXVIII Psalm, JDeus, venerunt gentes, is then sung. After the first verse the Bishop sits down, resumes his mitre, and remains seated, until the antiphon is repeated at the end of the Psalm. 10. The antiphon having been repeated, the Bishop lays aside the mitre, rises, and turning towards the altar, says the prayer, Nostrorum tibi, etc., and the other prayers marked in the Pontifical. 11. Then the Bishop ascends to the seat prepared for him on the platform of the altar. After this, the deacon presents the censer. The Bishop puts incense into the censer, then gives his blessing to the deacon, who after- wards proceeds to sing the Gospel, with the accustomed ceremonies ; the Bishop having taken off his mitre, stands at his seat turned towards the deacon. 12. When the Gospel has been sung, the Bishop kisses the book, and is incensed. Then the Bishop kneels before his seat, and the clergy kneeling also at their places, he intones the hymn, Vend, Creator, which is continued by the choir till the end, as on the first day. After the first verse, the Bishop rises, and stands with the mitre on, his face being towards the altar ; the clergy likewise stand until the end of the hymn. The hymn being sung, they sit in silence. Then the Bishop being seated, and having 32 378 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. received the mitre, addresses the clergy in the words of the Pontifical ; or others, at his discretion. 13. After the address, or before it, if the Bishop thinks proper, a discourse is delivered by some learned priest, who treats of ecclesiastical discipline, or of other subjects at the pleasure of the Bishop. After this, the Archdeacon reads the decrees of the Holy See, or of Provincial Councils, which have not yet been promulgated, or any others the Bishop may direct. Afterwards the Diocesan Constitutions are read, which are to be approved of by the Synod. Then the suffrages are taken, and those which are approved of are confirmed. This being done, the Bishop rises, and gives his solemn blessing, as on the preceding day. Then all retire. 14. On the third day, the clergy being assembled in the church, at the end of Mass, the Bishop dressed as on the preceding days, accompanied by the deacon and sub-deacon, makes a genuflection on the lowest step, in the middle of the altar, and laying aside his mitre, commences the anti- phon, .Exaudi nos, Deus, which is continued by the choir. Then is intoned the LXVIII Psalm, Salvum mefac, Deus, as on the first day, and the antiphon is repeated at the end of it. After the first verse the Bishop takes his seat in the middle of the altar, resumes his mitre, and remains sitting until the antiphon is repeated. When this is sung, he puts aside his mitre, rises, and turning towards the altar, says, Oremus, Ad te, Domine, and the other prayers mentioned in the Pontifical. When these are said, he resumes his mitre, and sits on the faldstool prepared for him. Then the deacon, with the censer-bearer, comes to him, and the Bishop puts incense into the censer. Then he gives his blessing to the deacon, who proceeds to sing the Gospel at the accustomed place, with the usual ceremonies ; the Bishop standing before his seat, without his mitre, and turned towards the deacon. 15. After the Gospel, the book is brought to the Bishop to be kissed, and the deacon incenses him. The Bishop, having taken off his mitre, kneels before his seat, turned towards the altar, and all the others likewise kneeling, he DIOCESAN SYNODS. 379 intones the hymn, Veni, Creator Spiritus, which is con- tinued by the choir to the end. The first verse having been sung, the Bishop rises, turned towards the altar, with- out his mitre, and remains standing till the end. The hymn being ended, all sit in silence. Then the Bishop, being seated with his mitre, addresses the Synod, if he pleases, in the words which follow — Venerabiles fratres, etc. ; or he may direct that some learned priest should de- liver a discourse on the topics herein mentioned. 16. Then the constitutions are read, which are to be ap- proved by the Fathers ; which being approved, if it seems good to them, and all things being concluded, the Bishop being seated, and having his mitre on, recommends himself to the prayers of all. When the names of those who ought to be present are read out, each one rises and answers Adsum. A fine is inflicted on the absent. Then the Bishop, being still seated with his mitre on, admonishes those who are present, in the words of the Pontifical, Fratres dilectis- simi, etc., or in other words at discretion. 17. Then the Bishop lays aside his mitre, and rising, turned towards the altar, says the prayer, Nulla est, etc. ; afterwards, he gives his solemn blessing. After this, the Archdeacon, standing by his side, says Procedamus in pace, to which all answer, In nomine Christi. Amen. Then all rise, and accompany the Bishop to his house. 18. If either on the first or second day all the business of the Synod be terminated, the Synod may be concluded in the manner here prescribed for the third day. 380 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. CHAPTEE XV. SOLEMN ADMINISTRATION OF THE SACRAMENT OF CONFIRMATION. Article I. Things to be Prepared. 1. On the Gospel side of the sanctuary, the Bishop's chair raised on a platform by two or three steps, with a canopy over it, and hangings behind it. 2. On the altar, the Bishop's vestments, viz., the amice, stole, cope, mitre, and crosier. 3. On the side-table, the Pontifical book, the candlestick with a candle, the vessel containing the holy chrism, on a small plate, a sufficient quantity of cotton to wipe the fore- head (this cotton should be divided in small balls for greater convenience), a ewer and basin, to wash the Bishop's hands, clean towels on a plate, some slices of bread, neatly cut and arranged on another small plate, for the same purpose. 4. Outside of the sanctuary, but near the rails, some benches for those who are to be confirmed ; all the men at the Epistle side, and the women at the Gospel side. 5. Those, who are to be confirmed, should have been previously instructed and prepared by the sacrament of Penance ; and it is advisable that they receive on the same day the Holy Communion, w T hich may be done either at the Bishop's Mass, or at the High Mass, as may be deemed most convenient. Each ought to have a ticket, on which should be written the Christian and family name, which each should hold in the hand, w 7 hen he kneels to receive Confirmation, and give to the clergyman who attends the Bishop. This will answer the double purpose of suggest- ing the Christian name to the Bishop, and of recording it, together with the family name, in the Register. CONFIRMATION. 381 6. Where it is customary to have sponsors, these should be placed behind the persons to be confirmed, and should be no more than one for each, and of the same sex as the person to be confirmed. 7. It is customary in some places to add another name on this occasion, especially if that which they have be not of some saint. The adopted name ought to be written after the name received at baptism, and called with it by the Bishop. 8* It is proper that the solemn administration of Con- firmation should be made at High Mass, either before it commences, or, as it seems more convenient, especially if the persons to be confirmed receive communion at it, after Mass. 9. There should be four boys dressed as those who usu- ally attend at High Mass, one to hold the mitre, another the crosier, another the book, and another the candlestick. Article II. The Administration of the Sacrament of Confirmation. 1. At the stated hour, the Bishop, attended by the clergy and preceded by the acolytes, goes to the church ; on ar- riving before the altar, he makes a genuflection, kneels on the lowest step, and prays for awhile with the clergy ; then he goes to his seat ; there he takes off his cape, washes his hands, puts on the above-mentioned vestments, which are carried before him by the acolytes, puts on the mitre, and having taken the crosier in his left hand, goes to the altar. If Confirmation be given after High Mass, the Bishop might assist at it in mitre and cope ; in this case, after he has been vested, he goes to the altar to begin Mass ; the priest who celebrates Mass ought to come to the sanctuary in his sacerdotal dress, walking immediately before the Bishop ; having made a genuflection, when the Bishop goes to his chair, the celebrant should go to his seat, and remain there sitting, until the Bishop is vested, then he goes to the altar, places himself at the left of the Bishop, and does 382 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. everything as directed for High Mass celebrated in presence of the Bishop. 2. On arriving at the altar, the Bishop kneels, and although it is not prescribed by the Pontifical, the hymn, Veni, Creator Spiritus, and the prayer, Deus qui cor da fidelium, are generally sung. Then, either the Bishop or some other clergyman, if the Bishop chooses, gives an in- struction on the holy sacrament of Confirmation. 3. After the instruction, the persons to be confirmed are directed to kneel at the rails, holding the tickets in their hands; then the Bishop, turned towards them, takes off his mitre, sings, Spiritus Sanctus, etc., and all the rest as in the Roman Pontifical, with the prayer, Omnipotens, semipterne Deus, extending his hand on them, 4. The prayer being ended, the Bishop puts on the mitre, takes the crosier in his left hand, and goes to the rails, where he anoints the foreheads of the persons whom he confirms, and having said, In nomine Patris, etc., and touched the cheek, says, Pax tecum. Et cum spiritu tuo is not said. One of them, at his right, holds the vessel with the chrism, the other, at his left, wipes the foreheads of those who have been anointed, with the cotton, which an acolyte holds on a plate near him ; and either he or another clergyman takes the tickets from the hands of the persons to be confirmed, and suggests their Christian name to the Bishop. 5. When the Bishop has confirmed the men at the Epistle side, and as he continues to confirm the women at the Gos- pel side, if there be more than one row of them, the men already anointed are directed to retire, walking one after the other, behind the last row, and those of the second row take the place of the first at the rails, those next to them advancing forward ; the same is done when the women at the Gospel side are anointed ; and so on successively. 6. The Bishop having anointed all those who were to be confirmed, goes to his seat; the acolytes carry to him the ewer with the basin, the towel and the plate with slices of bread ; he washes his hands, and in the meanwhile the choir sings, Confirma hoc, Deus, etc., or if there be no choir, the Bishop's attendants read it; then he returns to the VISITATION OF PARISHES. 383 altar, and turned towards it, sings the verses, Ostende, etc., the prayer, Deus, qui apostolis, etc. ; afterwards, he turns towards the confirmed, blesses them, as in the Pontifical, gives them the admonitions suggested by the Roman Pon- tifical, and tells them to say once, I believe in God, Our Father, and Hail Mary. 7. It is proper that the pastor of the congregation should say aloud, w T ith the confirmed, the above prayers enjoined by the Bishop, before they leave the church. 8. The Bishop returns to his seat, takes off the sacred vestments, puts on the cape, and accompanied by the clergy, after a short prayer before the altar, retires. CHAPTER XVI. EPISCOPAL VISITATION OF PARISHES.* Article I. The Bishop's Reception, when he visits the Parishes of his Diocese. 1. As it would be incovenient in this country to make the solemn procession as directed in the Roman Pontifical, the essential part of the ceremony might be performed when he goes to the church to administer Confirmation, or the first time the faithful meet in it after his arrival in the parish. 2. He proceeds, accompanied by the clergy, from the priest's house, if near the church, or from the sacristy to the church. On entering it, the clergy or the choir sing the response, Ecce Sacerdos magnus, qui in diebus suis placuit Deo, etc., in the office, Confessoris Pontificis; and the parish priest offers to the Bishop the sprinkle with holy * £x Pont. Bom., Part 3. 384 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. water ; the Bishop having received it, first applies to his own forehead, and then sprinkles the others; then the priest presents to him the boat, and the Bishop puts incense into the censer, and the parish priest incenses him. After- wards, they all go before the high altar, there the Bishop kneels before the faldstool, or the praying-desk, placed below the steps, in the middle ; the clergy likewise kneel, and pray for a short time. In the meantime, the parish priest standing with his head uncovered, at the corner of the altar, on the Epistle side, sings what follows : V. Protector noster, aspice, Deus. R. Et respice in faciem Christi tui. V. Salvum fac servum tuum. R. Deus meus, sperantem in te. V. Mitte ei, Domine, auxilium de Sancto. R. Et de Sion tuere eum. V. Nihil proficiat inimicus in eo. R. Et filius hominis non apponat nocere ei. V. Domine, exaudi orationem meam. R. Et clamor meus ad te veniat. V. Dominus vobiscum. R. Et cum spiritu tuo. O REMUS. Omnipotens sempiterne Deus, qui facis mirabilia magna solus, prsetende super hunc famulum tuum et cunctas con- gregationes illi commissas spiritum gratise salutaris, et, ut in veritate tibi complaceat, perpetuum ei rorem. tuse bene- dictionis infunde. Per Christum Dominum nostrum. R. Amen. 3. The choir sings an antiphon in honor of the patron Saint ; and whilst the verses are sung, the Bishop rises, goes up to the altar, kisses it in the middle, then goes to the Epistle side, and there standing, turned towards the altar, sings the prayer of the same saint. 4. When the visit is the first that the Bishop makes to the parish, instead of the above prayer, Omnipotens, etc., the parish priest sings the following : VISITATION OF PARISHES. 385 Oremus. Deus, omnium fideliura pastor et rector, famulum tuum N. quern Ecclesias tuse prseesse voluisti, propitius respice, da ei quaesumus verbo et exemplo, quibus praeest proficere, ut ad vitam una cum grege sibi credito perveniat sem- piternam. Per Christum Dominum nostrum. P. Amen. On the subsequent visits which the Bishop makes to the parishes of his diocese, instead of the above prayer, the following is said : Oremus. Deus, humilium visitator, qui eos paterna dilectione consolaris, pnetende societati nostra? gratiam tuam ; ut per eos, in quibus habitas, tuum in nobis sentiamus ad- ventum. Per Christum Dominum nostrum. 5. After the prayer, the Bishop gives the solemn bless- ing to the people, saying as usual, Sit nomen Domini benedictum, etc., and the Indulgences are published. 6. He then addresses the people, or, if he chooses, after the Gospel at High Mass. 7. High Mass is then celebrated as usual, with the ceremonies to be performed when the Bishop is present. 8. After Mass, the Bishop puts on the amice, alb, cincture, and the black stole and cope, with the plain mitre, and standing near the altar, turned towards the people, intones the anthem, Si iniquitates, and says alter- nately with the clergy, the Psalm, De profundis, etc., and after it, Requiem, etc., repeats the anthem, Si iniquitates observaveris, Domine, Domine, quis sustinebit f Then hav- ing taken off the mitre, he says : Kyrie eleison. R. Kyrie eleison. Kyrie eleison. Pater noster, etc., which is continued secretly. Et ne nos inducas in tentationem. P. Sed libera nos a malo. V. In memoria seterna erit Justus. P. Ab auditione mala non timebit. 33 386 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. Y. A porta inferi. R. Erue, Domine, animas eorum. Y. Requiem seternam dona eis, Domine. R. Et lux perpetua luceat eis. Y. Domine, exaudi orationem meam. R. Et clamor meus ad te veniat. Y. Dominus vobiscum. R. Et cum spiritu tuo. Oremus. Deus qui inter Apostolicos sacerdotes famulos tuos pontificali fecisti dignitate vigere; prsesta qusesumus, ut eorum quoque perpetuo aggregentur consortio. Per Chris- tum Dorninum nostrum. R. Amen. 9. The prayer being ended, if the grave-yard be ad- jacent to the church, the Bishop, preceded by the cross, the acolytes with the candlesticks, and two others with the censer, and the holy-water vase and sprinkle, and all the clergy, two by two, go in procession to the grave- yard ; but if it be not convenient to the church, they go to the middle of the church, where a cenotaph, with at least four candles, is placed, and the Bishop makes the ab- solution of the dead. The choir and clergy, while going, sing, Qui Lazarum resuscitasti a monumento foetidum, Tu eis, Domine, dona requiem et locum indulgentice. V. Qui venturus es judicare vivos et mortuos, et scecuhcm per ignem, Til eis, etc. Then the anthem Si iniquitates is intoned, the Psalm De profundis is sung, and the anthem repeated. 10. On arriving at the grave-yard, or at the cenotaph, the response Libera me Domine is sung, and repeated as usual ; the Bishop puts incense into the censer ; after the Kyrie eleison has been sung thrice, the Bishop sings Pater noster, which is continued secretly, sprinkles and incenses as usual, and says : Et ne nos inducas in tentationem. R. Sed libera nos a malo. Y. In memoria seterna erunt justi. R. Ab auditione mala non timebunt. Y. A porta inferi. VISITATION OF PARISHES. 387 R. Erue, Domine, animas eorum. V. Requiem seternam dona eis, Domine. R. Et lux perpetua luceat eis. V. Domine, exaudi oratioiiem meam. R. Et clamor meus ad te veniat. V. Dominus vobiscum. V. Et cum spiritu tuo. Oremtjs. Deus qui inter Apostolicos sacerdotes famulos tuos sacerdotali fecisti dignitate vigere, prsesta qusesumus ut eorum quoque perpetuo aggregentur consortio. Deus venise largitor, et humanse salutis amator, qusesu- mus clementiam tuam, ut nostras congregation is fratres, propinquos, et benefactores, qui ex hoc sseculo transierunt, Beata Maria semper virgine intercedente, cum omnibus Sanctis tuis, ad perpetua? beatitudinis consortium pervenire, concedas. Deus, cujus miseratione animse fidelium, requiescunt, famulis et famulabus tuis omnibus, hie et ubique in Christo quiescentibus, da propitius veniam peccatorum, ut, a cunctis reatibus absoluti, tecum sine fine lsetentur. Per Christum Dominum nostrum. R. Amen. V. Requiem seternam dona eis, Domine. R. Et lux perpetua luceat eis. Then two singers sing Requiescant in pace. R. Amen. The Bishop, raising his hand, makes the sign of the cross on the grave-yard, or on the cenotaph, puts on his mitre, and returns to the sanctuary, saying alternately with the clergy the Psalm Miserere. 11. On arriving before the altar, the Bishop takes oif the mitre, makes a genuflection on the lowest step, and stand- ing before it in the middle, turned towards the altar, says : Eyrie eleison. Christe eleison. Kyrie eleison. Pater noster, etc. Et ne nos inducas in tentationem. R. Sed libera nos a malo. 388 PONTIFICAL CEREMONIES. V. A porta inferi. K. Erue, Domine, animas eorum. V. Domine, exaudi orationem meam. R. Et clamor meus ad te veniat. V. Dominus vobiscum. R. Et cum spiritu tuo. Oremus. Absolve, qusesumus, Domine, animas famulorum, famu- larumque tuarum ab omni vinculo delictorum, ut in resur- rectionis gloria inter sanctos et electos tuos resuscitati res- pirent. Per Christum Dominum nostrum. R. Amen. 12. This being ended, the Bishop takes off his black cope and stole, and puts on a white cope and stole, and begins the visitation by the tabernacle, where the Blessed Sacrament is kept; then proceeds to the baptismal font, to the place where the sacred oils are kept, also to that where the relics are kept ; visits and inspects the altars, chapels, sacristy, the sacred vestments, the confessionals, and every- thing relating to the divine worship ; also the parish reg- isters, the grave-yard, etc. THE THINGS SUBJECT TO THE EPISCOPAL VISITATION ARE THE FOLLOWING: Tabernacle. Veil, and how many. Interior lining. Corporal spread out. Ciborium: bowl silver, gilt within. Processional canopy. Of the Holy Eucharist. Veil of ciborium. Particles. Fragments. Renewed, how often. Key. Lamp, always burning. Umbrellino for processions. Pyx, for the sick. BursH, etc., for communion of the sick. Monstrance. Throne, for benediction. Portable lanterns. Humeral veil. Font. Cover. Rails. Of the Baptistery. Water. Drain. Shell. Holy oils. Salt. Cloths. Ambry on the Gospel side of Sanctuary. Inscription (exterior and interior). Of the Holy Oils. Vessel for holy oils. Cotton wet with oil, dry cotton above. 1 Purple burse, or cover. How brought from the ca- thedral. Renewal. Burning the old. VISITATION OF PARISHES. 389 Of the Confessionals. In a public position. Thick veil. Doors with bolt. Pierced grating. Pictures. Of the Holy Relics. Ambry. Names. Key. Lining. Approbation. Proper Offices. Reliquaries. Exposition. Of the Altars. Festivals. High Altar. Candlesticks. Canopv. Steps up to it. Statues. Predella. Steps upon it. Pictures. Credence. Stone Altar. Altar-cards. Piscina. Consecration. Covering. Screen, or rails. Wax-cloth. Cloths for changing. Bell. Altar-cloths. Antependiums, and how Endowment. Their blessing. many. Obligations. Crucifix. Of the Church itself. Choir. Alms-chests. Use of bells. Large Crucifix, in a promi- Holy-water stoups. Subterranean chapels. nent place. Doors. Patron. Bishop's throne, steps, and Churchyard. Improper epitaphs. canopy. Cross therein. Burying-place for the Nave and aisles. Trees. clergy Walls. Bell-tower. And for children. Images of saints. Bells. Titulars of church. Pulpit. Their blessing. Dedication. Windows. Ladders, ropes. Both festivals. Vaults. Roof. Office, how held. Seats. Spire. Other festivals. Division of sexes. Weathercock. Indulgences. Roof. Pavement. Forty hours' Prayer. Pavement. Door. Benediction, how often. Ambry. Key. Of the Sacristy. Lights, how many. Ambries. Chalices. Lavabo-dishes. Lavatory. Pat dicta verba proferendi gratia ; respondere Amen, aut con- tinuare secreta priusquam responsio Suscipiat a ministro compleatur. LV. Ad Sursum corda clausas attollere manus aut palmis non ad invicem sed ad Altare conversis. LVI. Inclinare caput ad ubique gratias agere aut ad 418 APPENDIX. verba per Christum Dominum nostrum in pra?fatione, vel alio etiam loco prseterquam post Memento defunctorurn. LVII. Pectus percutere dicendo Sanctus aut non me- diocri voce dicere ipsum ; recitare voce intelligibili totum Canonem aut aliquot ejus partes, quurn omnia secreto dicenda sint. LVIII. Non jungere manus priusquam signa Crucis faciat, aut suspensam tenere sinistram, dum dextera ac- tionem aliquam exsequitur. LIX. Digitos saliva conspergere ad evolvenda Missalis folia. LX. Immorari nimis in memento, vel nimia brevitate conficere, aut alta voce proferre Memento Domine, etc. LXI. Pollices supponere palmis manuum dicendo Hanc igitur oblationem, etc. LXII. Abstergere digitos, antequam accipiat Hostiam, non extremo sed medio corporali prope Hostiam. LXIII. Imponere brachium sinistrum Altari sustinendo Hostiam ante Consecrationem ad verba benedixit, f regit, etc LXIV. Insistere et incurvari indecenter super Altare proferendi caussa Consecrationis verba. LX V. Proferendo verba Consecrationis gesticulari capite aut contorquere corpus ; non proferre ilia secreto, eadem verba repetere, dicere sufflando, aut pedem dexterum sus- pension tenere ut statim possit genuflecti. LXVI. Xon removere de Altari cubitos nee ferre manu- um articulos versus frontem Altaris post Consecrationem, ut com mod ius genuflectatur. LXVII. Post elevationem Hostise detegere Calicem, postea genuflectere. LXVIII. Accipere Calicem ad verba Accipiens et hune prceclarum Calicem nianu dextera tantum, os et nasum Calici imponere, aut inclinare eum ad se vel Altari appli- catum tenere. LXIX. In elevatione non sequi oculis Hostiam et Calicem aut elevare et demittere nimis festinanter, aut plus a?quo sustinere sublime in conspectum adstantium, aut nimis attollere extensis monstruose brachiis, aut tarn parum attollere ut conspici non possint, aut elevando super caput ponere, aut Calicem osculari. APPENDIX. 419 LXX. Verba Hcec quotiescumque, etc., tempore elevati- onis dicere, non post Consecrationis verba dam genuflectitur. LXXI. Non genuflectere usque in terrain, vel genu- nectere inconcinne et properanter. LXXII. Non ten ere pollices et indices junctos a Con- secratione usque ad purificationem, aut Hostiam tangere digitis inferioribus, aut digitos istos non extendere quum Hostiam accipiet. LXXIII. Ponere manus junctas super Altare omnino intra corporale post Consecrationem non sequendo prsescrip- tiones a rubrica expressas una in perpetuum vice sine ulla distinctione aut liniitatione. LXXIV. Pausam facere in commemoratione defunc- torum antequam dicatur qui nos prcecesserunt, etc., aut alta voce dicere Memento etiam, Domine, aut reliquas Ipsis, Domine, etc. LXXV. Pectus non digitis tribus inferioribus percutere, et reliquis junctis tangere casulam ad Nobis quoque pecca- toribus, ad Agnus Dei, ad Domine non sum dignus. LXXVI. Inclinare caput dicendo Nobis quoque pecca- toribus, aut alta voce dicere etiam famulis tuis cum suspirio, vel dicere Amen ante Per quern hcec omnia. LXXVI I. Caput etiam inclinare ad Prceceptis salutari- bus, aut recitare ilia apertis manibus, aut oculos non de- figere in Sacramentum quum recitabitur Pater noster, aut pateuam de corporali deducere eamque abstergere prius- quam minister respondent Amen, aut non abstergere, manu tantum dextera, sed adjuncta etiam sinistra. LXX VIII. Non applicare sinistram infra pectus quum signo Crucis se muniat. LXXIX. Osculari patenam in parte inferiori aut in margine, vel abstergere super planetam aut in alia parte postquam illam osculatus sit. LXXX. Purificare digitos fragmentis terendo unum post alterum in labro Calicis. LXXXI. Se vertere ad alterutram partem dicendo Domine, non sum dignus, aut brachium sinistrum imponere Altari. LXXXII. Crucis signum Hostia efncere extra limites patense et frontis suae in Communionis actu, aut expuere 420 APPENDIX. dum sumpturus est, vel etiam osculari S. Hostiam ante- quam sumat. LXXXIII. Ximia vel modica diligentia peccare in colligendis fragmentis, et collectis intra Calicem injiciendis. LXXXTV. Sumere Calicem strependo labiis, aut oculis sublatis, aut sensim et similia. LXXXV. Pallani patense imponere antequam transeat in cornu Epistolse ad accipiendam ablutionem, aut earn purificatorio abstergere. LXXXVI. Accipiendo purificationem ponere Calicem super Altare, aut extra Altare ilium ministro porrigere nulla cogente necessitate. LXXXYII. Extergere labia aut os digitis jam ablutis vino et aqua antequam purificatorio extergantur. LXXXVIII. Corporale complicare elato in altum Calice, bursam ponere non versa ante pectus apertura ejus, et relinquere velum ex parte anteriori sublatum. LXXXIX. Sinere ut minister, quamquam Clericus, multo pejus si laicus sit, Calicem cooperiat et accomodet. XC. Missale non claudere, ut prsescribitur, et conclu- sionem ultimse orationis absolvere veniendo ad medium Altare. XCI. Se inclinare ad populum dicendo Be missa est, aut dicendo Benedicamus Domino se inclinare ad Altare aut convertere ad populum. XCII. In discessu de Altari accipere biretum antequam reverentiam vel genuflexionem efficiat, aut illud sibi de capite detrahere priusquam reverentiam fecerit ad Cruceni vel imaginem praecipuam Sacrarii. XCIII. Paramenta acervatim deponere in exuendo se, non osculari stolam, manipulum, amictum, aut sibi albam detrahere ex adverso. XCIV. Sermones conserere et confabulari in Sacrario, aut ex illo et Ecclesia discedere quin tempus conveniens intercesserit pro debita gratiarum actione. XCV. Quod ad defectus spectat in rubricis generalibus pluribus capitibus notatos, quum de rebus agatur, quas omnis Sacerdos novisse et probe scire tenetur, quasque potest unus quisque in Missali legere et perpendere, potius quam eadem capita retractem-us, in totum silentio pra3terire operas pretium visum est. INDEX. Absolut ion after Mass for the dead, 297 Acolytes, Instruction for the, at the High Mass, 146 ; at Solemn Vespers, 185 A Cunc-Us, What Saint to be named in 13, n. Adorna thalamum, 80 Advent, Sundays in, when Bishop officiates, 324 All Souls, Vespers of, 202 ; when Bishop officiates, 323 Altar, Mode of Kissing, 10, n. Altar Veil, 76 Ambry, 2, n. Antependium, what, 1, n. Archbishop, 277 ; vesting of, 273 Ash Wednesday, necessary preparations, 81, 210, 329 ; blessing of Ashes, 81, 210 ; Mass, 84, 214 ; when Bishop officiates, 330 Ashes, blessing of, 81, 210 ; distribution, 81, 210 Ashes, putting on of, 83 # Asperges, when there is but one priest, 122 Assistant Deacon, Instructions for, 304 ; their quality, dress, and place, 304 ; at Pontifical Vespers, 305 ; at Pontifical Mass, 306 ; when the Bishop does not celebrate, 307 Assistant Priest, his quality, dress, and place, 300 ; his office in general, 301 ; his office at Pontifical Vespers, 301 ; at Pon- tifical Mass, 302 ; when the Bishop does not celebrate, 304 Baptism of Infants on Holy Saturday, 257 Benediction with the Blessed Sacrament, 126 ; ceremonies when but one Priest, 127 ; when assisted by another Priest, 131 ; by Bishop, 133 36 422 INDEX. Bishop, what, to be named in memento, 20, n. ; what Mass on Ember Days when he ordains, 34, n. ; serving of, at Low Mass, 57 ; when there is but one chaplain, 62 ; Mass in pres- ence of, 43 ; Mass and Vespers solemnly celebrated by, 261, 265 ; Solemn Vespers in presence of, 265 ; Complins by, 266 ; Matins, 267 ; Lauds, 269 ; Matins and Lauds for the Dead, 293 ; Solemn Pontifical Mass, 269 ; Seat of, 269 ; Vespers for the Dead by, 292 ; Instructions for officers who attend, 300 ; on All Souls, 323 ; Sundays in Advent, 324 ; Christmas, 325 ; Festivals between Christmas and Candlemas, 326 ; Candle- mas, 327 ; Ash Wednesday, 329 ; Sundays in Lent, 332 ; Palm Sunday, 333 ; Maundy Thursday, 336 ; the Mandatum, or washing of the feet, 335 ; Good Friday, 346 ; what to be prepared for, ib., to the beginning of the office, 348; the office, 349 ; Holy Saturday, 354 ; what to be prepared for, 355 ; Solemn Administration of Confirmation, 380 ; Visita- tion of Parishes, 383 Blessed Sacrament, how often to be renewed, 29, n. ; Low Mass, when it is exposed, 41 ; Solemn Vespers, when it is exposed, 196 ; when exposed, no bow made to any one in Sanctuary, 199 ; Collect of, to be said wheu Blessed Sacrament is ex- posed, 35 Book-bearer, Instruction for, 321 Bows, 6, ?i., 51 Burse, 31, 50 Calotte, what, 137, n. Candle-bearer, Instructions for, 322 Candlemas, blessing of Candles, 175, 326 ; distribution, 178, 326 ; procession, 79 ; when Bishop officiates, 326 ; Mass after the procession, 81 Canon, what, 57, n. Cappa Magna, 292, n. Celebrant, at High Mass, Instruction for the, 173 ; at Vespers, 183 Censer-bearer, Instruction for, at High Mass, 142 ; at Solemn Vespers, 186 Ceremonies of Low Mass, 1 ; High Mass, 64 ; Pontifical High Mass, 269 ; for the Dead, 180 ; Pontifical Mass for the Dead, 294 ; for the principal Festivals, 204 INDEX. 423 Chapter, Intonation for, 408 Choir, Rules for Clergy in, at High Mass, 135 ; at Vespers, 184 ; order to be observed, 136 ; internal dispositions, 138 ; order in going from, 140 Christmas, when Bishop officiates, 325 ; Festivals between Christ- mas and Candlemas, 326 Ciboriuni, Veil of, 16, n. ; Purification of, 48 Cincture, how made, 5 Commemoration of all the faithful departed, 202, 323 Communion at Masses for the dead, 40, n. ; general rules for Communion at Mass, 45 ; at other times, 48 ; at High Mass, 139 Complins, when Bishop officiates solemnly, 266 Confirmation, Solemn Administration of, 380 ; things to be pre- pared for, ib. ; the administration of the Sacrament, 381 Corporal, what, 4, n. ; Confiteor, Intonation for, 412 Corpus Christi, Procession on, and its octave, 200 Cope-bearers, Instruction for the, at Solemn Vespers, 191 ; Ves- pers without, 68 Credence, what, 2, n. Credo, generally omitted in Votive Masses, 36 Crosier-bearer, Instructions for, 319 Cross, Veneration of, on Good Friday, 100 Cruets, to be of glass, not of silver, 2, n. Cum appropinquaret, 88 Deacon, Instruction for the officiating, 308 ; deacon at High Mass, 165 Dead, Low Mass for the, 39 ; High Mass, 180 ; Vespers for the, 202 Defectuum Ehnclms. Append, in fine. Deus in adjutorium, Intonation, 407 Dies irce, when said, 40 Diocesan Synods, Ceremonies to be observed in, 375 Epistle, Intonation for, 410 Faldstool, what, 272 ; Ferial tones, 410 Font, Blessing of the, 117 Forty Hours, Exposition of the Blessed Sacrament, 391 424 INDEX. Forty Hours' Exposition, 391 ; things to be prepared, ih. ; of the Mass of the Exposition, 392 ; of the Procession for the Ex- position, 394 ; of the Mass, pro pace, 397 ; things to be pre- pared for the Mass of the Exposition, 398 ; of the Mass of the Reposition, 398 ; from the Litany to the end of the Forty Hours, 403 Genuflection, how made, 51 Gloria in Excelsis, in what votive Masses omitted, 35 Good Friday, what is to be prepared, 98 ; when Bishop officiates, 346 ; Office to the uncovering of the Cross, 99, 239, 240 ; un- covering and veneration of the Cross, 100, 236 ; Procession, 106, 242 ; remaining part of the office, 244 ; from the en- trance of the Bishop to the beginning of the office, 348 ; the office, 349 Gospel, Intonation for the, 411 High Mass, without deacon or subdeacon, 64 ; vesting, 65 ; ceremonies, 66 ; rules for clergy in choir, 135 ; order to be ob- served, 136 ; internal dispositions, 138 ; receiving Holy Com- munion, 139 ; going from Choir, 140 ; Preparation for, 141 ; Instructions for the offices at, 142 ; Instruction for celebrant, 173 ; incensing, 143. (See Pontifical Mass, Solemn Mass.) High Mass for the Dead, what to be observed particularly at, 180 ; Pontifical, 294 Holy Saturday, things to be prepared, 111, 247 ; when Bishop officiates, 354 ; office, 113 ; Benediction of the new fire, 113 ; by Bishop, 355 ; Exultet, 355 ; Blessing of the Paschal Can- dle, 115 ; by Bishop, 355 ; Prophecies, 116, 252 ; Blessing of the Font, 117, 358 ; by the Bishop, 358 ; Baptism of Infants, 119 ; Litany, Mass, 120, 360 ; Vespers, ib. ; bringing back the Pyx to the Altar, 121 ; to the beginning of Mass, when Bishop officiates, 359 ; Mass, 258, 360 Holy Week and other Festivals, Ceremonies for, 75 Host, how broken, 26 Incense-boat, 75 Incensing, manner of, 175 Incensing candles at Candlemas, 78 ; ashes, 83 ; palms, 87 ; the Blessed Sacrament in the Repository, 96 ; on Holy Saturday, INDEX. 425 106 ; at Benediction of the Blessed Sacrament, 128, 132 ; at High Mass, 143 ; in High Mass for the Dead, 182 ; at Solemn Vespers, 186 ; Corpus Christi, 196 Inferior ministers, at Pontifical Mass, instructions for, 300 Intonation for Mass and Yespers, 407 Latare and Gaudete Sundays, 215 Lauds, when the Bishop officiates, 269 ; for the Dead, 293 Lent, Sundays in, 332 ; when the Bishop officiates, 332 Low Mass, Ceremonies of, 1 ; what to be prepared for, 1,2; from Commencement to Introit, 9 ; Introit to the Epistle, 11 ; Epistle to the Offertory, 13 ; Offertory to the Canon, 15 ; Canon to the Consecration, 19 ; Consecration to the Pater Noster, 23 ; Pater Noster to the Communion, 25 ; Commu- nion to the end of Mass, 31 ; Low Mass for the Dead, 39 ; when the Blessed Sacrament is exposed, 41 ; in the pres- ence of Prelates, 43 ; manner of serving at, 51 ; Bishop at Low Mass, 57 Mandatum or Washing of Feet, 345 Mass, Preparations for, 3 ; Ceremonies for Low Mass, 1 ; Yotive Masses, 33 ; Mass pro Sponso et Sponsa, 35 ; Low Mass for the Dead, 39 ; High Mass, 141 ; High Mass for the Dead, 180 ; Pontifical Mass, Solemn, 269 ; for the Dead, 294 Mass, Solemn, in presence of the Bishop, 299 Masses for the Dead, classed among Yotive Masses, 34 ; when prohibited, 39 ; when allowed, 36 ; Dies irce, when said, 40 ; Low Mass for the Dead, 39 ; Communion at, 40 ; High Mass, 180 ; Pontifical, 294 ; things to be prepared, ib. ; the Mass, 295 ; absolution after Mass, 297 Master of Ceremonies, duty of; at High Mass, 150; at Solemn Yespers, 188 Matins, when the Bishop officiates, 267 ; for the Dead, 293 ; of Tenebrse, 336 Maundy Thursday, Preparation, 227 ; Mass, 228 ; Procession, 231 ; removal of the Pyx, 96 ; Yespers, 233 ; stripping of the Altar, 97, 233 ; when the Bishop officiates, 336 ; reposi- tory, how prepared, 91, 336 Mitre-bearer, Instruction for, 320 426 INDEX. Monstrance, 128 Mozetta, 262, n. Newly ordained priest, The three Masses of, 34 Obtulerunt Domine, 80 Officers, Instructions for the, at High Mass, 141 ; censer-bearer, 142 ; acolytes, 146 ; master of ceremonies, 150 ; sub-deacon, 157; deacon, 165, 308 ; celebrant, 173 ; instruction for officers who attend Bishop, 300, 308 Officiating deacon, Instruction for, 308 Ordo, to be observed by priest celebrating in another church, 36 OmbrelMno, 196, n. Pall, what, 4, n. Palm Sunday, Preparation for, 215, 332 ; blessing of the palms, 85, 216 ; distribution of, 86, 218 ; procession, 87, 220 ; Mass and Passion, 222 ; when Bishop officiates, 332 Parishes, Episcopal visitation of, 383 Paschal Candles, Blessing of, 115 Pax, how given, 138 Peace, instrument of, 44 Pontifical mantle, 292 Pontifical Mass, Solemn, 269 ; things to be prepared, ib. ; vesting of the clergy and Bishop, 277 ; the Pontifical Mass, 269 ; for the Dead, 294; things to be prepared, ib. ; the Mass, 295 ; absolution after Mass, 297 Popule ineus, 102 Prelates, what, 43 Priest, preparation for Mass, 3 ; at Low Mass, 6 ; after Mass, 33 ; instruction for, at High Mass, 173 ; assistant priest, 304 Procession at Candlemas, 79 ; Palm Sunday, 85, 332 ; Maundy Thursday, 91,336; Good Friday, 98,346; Corpus Christi and its octave, 200, 203 ; at Provincial Councils, 361 Prophecies on Holy Saturday, 252 Provincial Councils, Ceremonies to be observed in, 361 ; how the Metropolitan Church is to be adorned and arranged, 362 opening of the council, 363 ; procession, 364 ; Mass, 364 Ceremonies for first session or opening of the council, 365 Mode of procedure, 368 ; second Solemn Session, 370 ; third Solemn Session, 372 INDEX. 427 Purification, Feast of the, necessary preparations, 204 ; from the Vesting to the distribution of the candles, 205 ; to the Pro- cession, 200 ; the Procession, 208 Purificator, what, 4, n. Pyx, Of the removal of the, 96 ; bringing back to the altar, 106, 121 Quarant 'Ore, 391 Remonstrance, see Monstrance. Repository, how prepared, 92, 228 ; procession to, on Maundy Thursday, 95, 231 ; on Good Friday, 106, 242 Requiem Masses, 34 ; Communion at, 40 Sacred Species, Renewal of, 29, n. Sanctuary, Chairs in, 136, n. ; rules for clergy in, 135, 184 Serving Mass, Low Mass, 51 ; Vesting, 52 ; the Mass, 53 ; Bish- op's Low Mass, 57 Sign of the Cross, how made, 9, n. Solemn Mass, in presence of Bishop in mitre and cope, 288 ; when in rochet and cope, 291 ; Intonations for, 406 Solemnities when Bishop officiates, 323 Stole, Use of, 69, n, Sub-deacon, Instruction for, at High Mass, 157 ; Pontifical Mass, 314 Tenebrse, Office of, 225 ; when Bishop officiates, 336 Two Masses on the same day, Order of, 37 Unrobing after Mass, 33 Vespers, without cope-bearer, 68 ; Solemn, 183 ; things to be prepared, ib. ; general rules for the clergy in the sanctuary, 184 ; instruction for cope-bearers, 191 ; for the celebrant, 194 ; Solemn Vespers, the Blessed Sacrament being exposed, 196 ; for the Dead, on November 1st, 202 ; things to be pre- pared, ib. ; peculiar ceremonies, 202 ; on Maundy Thursday, 336 ; Solemn Pontifical, 261 ; things to be prepared, ib. ; from the entrance to the beginning of Vespers, 262 ; to the end of Vespers, 263 ; Solemn Vespers in the presence of the 428 INDEX. Bishop, 265 ; All Souls, when the Bishop officiates, 292 ; Christmas, 324 ; intonations for, 408 Vesting priest at Low Mass, 52 ; Bishop, 57 Vexilla regis, 107 Visitation of the Parishes, 383 ; things subject to the Episcopal visitation, 388 Votive Masses, 33 ; Vestments at, 36 Votive Masses of the Holy Ghost, what does not warrant sing- ing, 35, n. Water, what quantity to be poured into chalice, 17, n. Wax candles, only two at Low Mass of priests, 1 /3* . fill r ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide Treatment Date: Jan. 2006 PreservationTechnologies A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive Cranberry Township. PA 16066 (724) 779-21 1t